WO2021023090A1 - 一种通信方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

一种通信方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021023090A1
WO2021023090A1 PCT/CN2020/105763 CN2020105763W WO2021023090A1 WO 2021023090 A1 WO2021023090 A1 WO 2021023090A1 CN 2020105763 W CN2020105763 W CN 2020105763W WO 2021023090 A1 WO2021023090 A1 WO 2021023090A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
indication information
format
cell
information
link failure
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/105763
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张荻
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CA3146666A priority Critical patent/CA3146666A1/en
Priority to EP20850580.0A priority patent/EP4007347A4/en
Publication of WO2021023090A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021023090A1/zh
Priority to US17/591,045 priority patent/US20220159767A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/04—Arrangements for maintaining operational condition
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/18—Management of setup rejection or failure
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H04B7/0868—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
    • H04B7/088—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0009—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the channel coding
    • H04L1/0011—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the channel coding applied to payload information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H04L5/001—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/19—Connection re-establishment

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication, and specifically to a communication method and communication device.
  • the beam may be blocked.
  • the signal cannot continue to be transmitted.
  • a corresponding mechanism is introduced to detect the beam quality and quickly restore the link in the case of blocking.
  • the terminal device performs beam failure detection. After the terminal device determines that the beam fails, it sends beam failure recovery request (BFRQ) information (or can also be called link failure recovery request information) to the network device, and the terminal device can indicate the link to the network device through the BFRQ information Information such as cell information of the failed cell.
  • BFRQ beam failure recovery request
  • the terminal device can indicate the link to the network device through the BFRQ information Information such as cell information of the failed cell.
  • the network device Before the terminal device sends the BFRQ information, the network device cannot know how many cells have link failures. Therefore, resources are generally reserved or the information format is designed according to the maximum number of cells in which link failures may occur. This may cause resource damage. waste.
  • the present application provides a communication method and communication device, so that when a terminal device reports information of a cell whose link fails, the waste of reporting resources can be reduced.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the communication method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip or a circuit configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the communication method may include: determining a link failure of at least one cell; sending first indication information, the first indication information indicating information of the link failure cell, wherein the first indication information is based on the link failure cell The situation is certain.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, the first indication information may be determined directly based on the condition of the link failure cell, or the first indication information may be indirectly based on the link failure The situation of the cell is determined.
  • the first indication information indicates the information of the cell where the link fails, and it can be understood that the first indication information includes the information of the cell where the link fails.
  • the information of the link failure cell may include: identification information of the link failure cell, and/or reference signal information, where the reference signal information is used to restore the link of the link failure cell.
  • the reference signal information may include the reference signal resource index and/or the channel quality of the reference signal (such as one or more of the following: RSRP, SINR, RSRQ, CQI, or SNR, etc.).
  • the reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources and/or SSB resources.
  • Reference signal information can be understood as reference signal resource information.
  • the reference signal resource information includes the index of the reference signal resource and/or the channel quality of the reference signal on the reference signal resource (such as one or more of the following: RSRP, SINR, RSRQ , CQI, or SNR, etc.).
  • the first indication information sent by the terminal device may be generated based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information to be sent is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, that is, by designing a variable length information format to indicate the cell information of the link failure, the terminal device can adaptively adjust the information sent
  • the size or format of the first indication information effectively reduces the reporting of redundant information and reduces the reporting overhead.
  • determining the resource carrying the first indication information based on the condition of the link-failed cell can enable a reasonable allocation of the resource carrying the first indication information, reduce resource waste, and improve resource utilization.
  • the communication method before sending the first indication information, further includes: sending the second resource on the corresponding second resource according to the condition of the link failure cell Two indication information, where the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, and the first indication information may be determined indirectly based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the first indication information may be based on the content of the second indication information. Determined, or the first indication information may be determined based on the second resource that carries the second indication information.
  • a plurality of second resources have a corresponding relationship with the situation of the link failure cell, and the terminal device selects a suitable second resource to send the second indication information according to the situation of the link failure cell in combination with the corresponding relationship.
  • the corresponding relationship may be pre-defined, such as pre-configured by the network device or pre-defined by the protocol, which is not limited.
  • the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails, which may indicate: the second indication information notifies the network device that the cell link failure occurs; or, the second indication information may also indicate that the network device has a cell link failure.
  • the second indication information indicates that the link of the cell fails, which may indicate: the second indication information indicates that the link of at least one cell among the L cells has failed, where L is an integer greater than 1.
  • the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails, which may indicate: the second indication information indicates the cell identities of the N cells where the link fails.
  • the terminal device sends the second indication information on the corresponding second resource according to the situation of the link failure cell, so that the network device can also learn the situation of the link failure cell based on the second resource.
  • the second indication information is used to request a first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the terminal device sends the second indication information on the corresponding second resource according to the link failure cell, so that the network device can also allocate the first resource of a suitable size to the terminal device based on the second resource, which can be effective Save resource overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the terminal device requests the network device to allocate the first resource, it means that the terminal device requests the network device to allocate a resource for carrying the first indication information, and does not mean that a specific block of resources is requested.
  • the communication method further includes: sending second indication information on a third resource, where the second indication information is used to request to carry the first Indicates the first resource of information.
  • the third resource may be a resource pre-divided for the terminal device, used for the terminal device to notify the network device of the cell link failure.
  • the terminal device may also request the network device to allocate the first resource carrying the first indication information through the content of the second indication information. For example, when the cyclic shift of the sequence of the second indication information is the first cyclic shift, the terminal device may be allocated a smaller first resource; when the cyclic shift of the sequence of the second indication information is the second cyclic shift, A larger first resource can be allocated to the terminal device. For another example, when the status value of the second indication information is the first value, the terminal device can be allocated a smaller first resource; when the status value of the second indication information is the second value, the terminal device can be allocated a larger resource The first resource.
  • the communication method before sending the first indication information, further includes: receiving third indication information, where the third indication information indicates to carry the first indication information. A first resource of indication information.
  • the network device allocates the first resource to the terminal device, it means that the network device allocates a certain block of resources for carrying the first indication information to the terminal device, which may indicate a certain block of resources.
  • the first resource carries the first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the first indication information in the corresponding format is sent on the first resource.
  • the format of the first indication information has a corresponding relationship with the resource allocated by the network device to carry the first indication information.
  • the format of the first indication information is short format; when the network equipment allocates relatively large resources to carry the first indication information, the format of the first indication information is long format. Specific examples are introduced below.
  • variable length information format can be designed to indicate the cell information of the link failure, and the first indication information of the corresponding format can be sent on the first resource, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, including: the format of the first indication information is based on the link failure The condition of the cell is determined; and/or the resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • variable-length information format can be designed to indicate link failure cell information, and the first indication information in a suitable format can be selected according to the condition of the link failure cell, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • a resource of a suitable size may be used to carry the first indication information, thereby improving resource utilization and reducing resource waste.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format or a second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy the following: Or multiple items: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format The indication information indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, where N1 and N2 are integers greater than or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the above-mentioned number of bits, the number of information of the link failure cell, and the load may all refer to the maximum value.
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format indicates the maximum number of bits that can be sent in the first indication information in the format.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format
  • the first indication information of the first format includes one or more of the following information: The serving cell identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a state value, and the first field indicates the link failure indicated by the serving cell identity field Whether there is a corresponding second field in the cell, the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field.
  • the serving cell identification field indicates a link failure cell, and the serving cell identification field may indicate one or more link failure cells, and it is not limited to one cell here.
  • each cell indicated in the serving cell ID field may have a corresponding first field.
  • the link failure cell includes the first cell and the second cell, and the link failure of the first cell and the second cell is indicated through the serving cell identification field.
  • the first field corresponding to the first cell indicates whether the first cell has a second field
  • the first field corresponding to the second cell indicates whether the second cell has a second field.
  • the format of the first indication information is a second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell The identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap, and the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field is There is a corresponding second field, and the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identification field.
  • the first indication information indicates the link failure by means of a state value The identity of the cell; and/or, in the case that the condition of the link failure cell does not meet the preset condition, the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in a bitmap manner.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the validity of the information of the link failure cell The load is less than or equal to the preset second threshold.
  • the preset first threshold or the preset second threshold may be predefined, such as a protocol or a network device; or the network device may be configured for the terminal device; or it may be an empirical value Etc., there is no limitation on this.
  • the condition of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the first indication information used to report the information of the link failure cell can be determined based on one or more of the following: the number of link failure cells, the payload of the link failure cell information, whether Identify the situation of the reference signal used to restore the link failure cell, and so on.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the communication method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip or a circuit configured in the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the communication method may include: determining the link failure of at least one cell; determining the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell, the first indication information indicating the information of the link failure cell; and sending the first indication information.
  • the format of the first indication information is determined according to the condition of the link failure cell, and the terminal device may directly determine the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell; or, the terminal device may also indirectly determine the format of the first indication information according to the link failure cell.
  • the situation of the path failure cell determines the format of the first indication information.
  • variable length information format can be designed to indicate link failure cell information, and the first indication information in a suitable format can be selected according to the condition of the link failure cell, thereby reducing resource waste.
  • the first resource carries the first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the first indication information in the corresponding format is sent on the first resource.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format or a second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy the following: Or multiple items: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format The indication information indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, where N1 and N2 are integers greater than or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format
  • the first indication information of the first format includes one or more of the following information: The serving cell identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a state value, and the first field indicates the link failure indicated by the serving cell identity field Whether there is a corresponding second field in the cell, the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field.
  • the format of the first indication information is a second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell The identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap, and the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field is There is a corresponding second field, and the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identification field.
  • the first indication information indicates the link failure by means of a state value The identity of the cell; and/or, in the case that the condition of the link failure cell does not meet the preset condition, the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in a bitmap manner.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the validity of the information of the link failure cell The load is less than or equal to the preset second threshold.
  • the situation of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the communication method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a chip or circuit configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the communication method may include: receiving first indication information, the first indication information indicating information of a link failure cell, the first indication information being determined based on the condition of the link failure cell; and based on the first indication information To restore the link of the cell where the link failed.
  • the number of link failure cells reported by the terminal device may be greater than or equal to the number of link failure cells restored by the network device.
  • the network device can restore some or all of the links in the multiple cells.
  • the communication method before receiving the first indication information, further includes: receiving second indication information, where the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails ; Determine the first resource that carries the first indication information according to the second resource that carries the second indication information or the second indication information.
  • the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication information is determined according to the condition of the link failure cell.
  • determining the first resource carrying the first indication information according to the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication information may include: the network device according to the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication Information, to allocate a suitable size resource for carrying the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • determining the first resource carrying the first indication information according to the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication information may include: the network device according to the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication Information, activate the resource carrying the first indication information.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be a resource activated by the response information of the second indication information.
  • determining the first resource carrying the first indication information according to the second resource carrying the second indication information or the second indication information may include: pre-configuring multiple resources and multiple resources for carrying the second indication information
  • the resource used to carry the first indication information, and the association relationship between the plurality of resources used to carry the second indication information and the plurality of resources used to carry the first indication information the network device may according to the second indication information carrying the second indication information Resource, which determines the resource carrying the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may not send the first indication information through the resource allocated by the response information of the second indication information, but directly send it on the resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the network device may not need to send the response information indicating the resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device. Specific examples are described in detail below.
  • the terminal device can send the second indication information on the corresponding second resource based on the link failure cell, or generate the second indication information so that the network device can allocate the terminal device according to the second resource A resource of a suitable size for carrying the first indication information; or, the network device may activate the resource for carrying the first indication information for the terminal device; or, the network device may carry the second indication information according to the association between the second resource and the first resource Determine the corresponding first resource, that is, determine the first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the communication method further includes: sending third indication information, where the third indication information indicates a first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the network device can dynamically allocate a suitable size of the first resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the first resource carries the first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, including: the format of the first indication information is based on the link failure The condition of the cell is determined; and/or the resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format or a second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy the following: Or multiple items: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format The indication information indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, where N1 and N2 are integers greater than or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format
  • the first indication information of the first format includes one or more of the following information: The serving cell identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a state value, and the first field indicates the link failure indicated by the serving cell identity field Whether there is a corresponding second field in the cell, the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field.
  • the format of the first indication information is a second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell The identity field, the first field, or the second field; wherein the serving cell identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap, and the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field is There is a corresponding second field, and the second field indicates the reference signal information used for restoring the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identification field.
  • the first indication information indicates the link failure by means of a state value The identity of the cell; and/or, in the case that the condition of the link failure cell does not meet the preset condition, the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in a bitmap manner.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the validity of the information of the link failure cell The load is less than or equal to the preset second threshold.
  • condition of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • a communication device configured to execute the communication method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device may include a module for executing the communication method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a communication device is provided, and the communication device is configured to execute the communication method provided in the third aspect.
  • the communication device may include a module for executing the communication method provided in the third aspect.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the communication method in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect described above in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or related circuit on the chip or chip system, etc.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a terminal device.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the third aspect and the communication method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, the processor is coupled with the communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output information.
  • the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin, or related circuit on the chip or chip system.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system configured in a network device.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored.
  • the communication device realizes the first aspect or the second aspect, and the first or second aspect.
  • the communication method in any possible implementation of the two aspects.
  • a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored.
  • the communication device realizes the third aspect and any possible implementation of the third aspect The communication method in the mode.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, when the instructions are executed by a computer, the communication device realizes the communication method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when executed by a computer causes a communication device to implement the communication method provided in the third aspect.
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the first indication information sent by the terminal device may be generated based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information to be sent is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, that is, by designing a variable length information format to indicate the cell information of the link failure, the terminal device can adaptively adjust the information sent
  • the size or format of the first indication information effectively reduces the reporting of redundant information and reduces the reporting overhead.
  • determining the resource carrying the first indication information based on the condition of the link-failed cell can enable a reasonable allocation of the resource carrying the first indication information, reduce resource waste, and improve resource utilization.
  • FIGS 1 and 2 are schematic diagrams of communication systems applicable to embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 shows a schematic diagram of the beam training process
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of a link failure recovery process
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6 to 14 show schematic diagrams of the format of the first indication information applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a format of a second resource and first indication information applicable to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 16 is another schematic interaction diagram of a communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • 5G mobile communication system may include non-standalone (NSA) and/or standalone (SA).
  • NSA non-standalone
  • SA standalone
  • the technical solution provided in this application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system.
  • the communication system may also be a PLMN network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, an Internet of things (IoT) network or other networks.
  • the IoT network may include, for example, the Internet of Vehicles.
  • the communication methods in the vehicle networking system are collectively referred to as V2X (X stands for anything).
  • the V2X communication includes: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle to roadside infrastructure (V2I ) Communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) or vehicle-to-network (V2N) communication, etc.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2I vehicle to roadside infrastructure
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be called: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • access terminal user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, notebook computers, palmtop computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grid (smart grid) Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocols , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in a 5G network, or terminal devices in a public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device can also be a terminal device in the IoT system.
  • IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology to realize man-machine Interconnection, an intelligent network of interconnection of things.
  • the IoT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and power saving of terminals through, for example, narrowband NB technology.
  • the terminal equipment may also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, gas stations, etc.
  • the main functions include collecting data (part of the terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network equipment, and sending electromagnetic waves. , To transmit uplink data to network equipment.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to communicate with terminal devices.
  • the network device may be a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system or code division multiple access
  • the base station (transceiver station, BTS) in CDMA) can also be the base station (NodeB, NB) in the wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or the evolved base station in the LTE system (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wearable device
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device in a wireless network, for example, a radio access network (RAN) node that connects a terminal to the wireless network.
  • RAN nodes are: base station, next-generation base station gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (eNB), home base station, baseband unit (BBU) , Or the access point (AP) in the WiFi system.
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • BBU baseband unit
  • AP access point
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • RAN equipment of DU node may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node (CU-UP node) and RAN equipment of DU node.
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating system, Unix operating system, Android operating system, iOS operating system, or windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided according to the embodiments of the application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • magnetic storage devices for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.
  • optical disks for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.
  • smart cards and flash memory devices for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • FIGS. 1 and 2 In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application is first described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may be in a single carrier scenario or a carrier aggregation scenario (CA).
  • Carrier aggregation may refer to the aggregation of multiple continuous or non-contiguous unit carriers into a larger bandwidth.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may communicate through a wireless link.
  • the terminal device 120 may send a link failure recovery request (BFRQ) to the network device 110.
  • BFRQ link failure recovery request
  • the network device 110 may send a link failure recovery response (beam failure recovery response, BFRR) to the terminal device 120 or reconfigure the link.
  • BFRR link failure recovery response
  • the network device 110 may include one or more cells. For example, including the first cell and the second cell, if the link between the terminal device 120 and the network device 110 in the second cell fails, the first cell can assist the second cell in link recovery.
  • the terminal device 120 can The BFRQ information is sent to the network device 110 on the uplink resource belonging to the first cell, and the terminal device 120 may receive the BFRR information sent by the network device 110 on the downlink resource belonging to the second cell.
  • the terminal device 120 When the transmission direction of the communication system 100 is uplink transmission, the terminal device 120 is the sending end, and the network device 110 is the receiving end.
  • the transmission direction of the communication system 100 is downlink transmission, the network device 110 is the sending end, and the terminal device 120 is the receiving end.
  • FIG. 2 shows another schematic diagram of a communication system 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 200 may be in a scenario of dual connectivity (DC), multi-link, or coordinated multipoint transmission/reception (CoMP).
  • DC dual connectivity
  • CoMP coordinated multipoint transmission/reception
  • the communication system 200 may include multiple network devices, such as the network device 210 and the network device 220 shown in FIG. 2; the communication system 200 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the one shown in FIG. Terminal equipment 230.
  • the terminal device 230 can establish a wireless link with the network device 210 and the network device 220 through a multi-connection technology.
  • the network device 210 may be, for example, a primary base station, and the network device 220 may be, for example, a secondary base station.
  • the network device 210 is the network device when the terminal device 230 is initially connected, and is responsible for radio resource control (RRC) communication with the terminal device 230.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device 220 may be added during RRC reconfiguration.
  • the terminal device 230 configured with carrier aggregation is connected to the network device 210 and the network device 220.
  • the link between the network device 210 and the terminal device 230 may be called the first link, and the link between the network device 220 and the terminal device 230 The link can be called the second link.
  • the network device 210 may be referred to as a master node (master node, MN).
  • the master node may be a master base station (master eNB, MeNB) or a master base station (master gNB, MgNB), which is not limited to this; then another network A device, such as the network device 220, may be referred to as a secondary node (SN).
  • master node MN
  • the master node may be a master base station (master eNB, MeNB) or a master base station (master gNB, MgNB), which is not limited to this; then another network A device, such as the network device 220, may be referred to as a secondary node (SN).
  • SN secondary node
  • the secondary node may be a secondary base station (secondary eNB, SeNB) or a secondary base station (secondary gNB, SgNB), and is not limited thereto.
  • multiple serving cells in the master node may form a master cell group (master cell group, MCG), including a primary cell (primary cell, PCell) and optionally one or more secondary cells (secondary cell, SCell).
  • Multiple secondary cells in the secondary node may form a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG), including a primary secondary cell (PSCell) and optionally one or more SCells.
  • the serving cell refers to the cell configured by the network for the terminal equipment to perform uplink and downlink transmission.
  • PCell primary serving cell
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • Primary secondary cell It can also be called secondary primary cell.
  • the PSCell is a special secondary cell on the secondary base station (secondary eNodeB, SeNB) configured by the master eNodeB (MeNB) through RRC connection signaling to the terminal equipment under the dual link.
  • secondary eNodeB secondary base station
  • MeNB master eNodeB
  • SCell refers to a cell configured to terminal equipment under carrier aggregation through RRC connection signaling. It works on a secondary carrier (SCC) and can provide more wireless resources for terminal equipment under carrier aggregation.
  • SCC secondary carrier
  • the SCell can have downlink or both uplink and downlink.
  • SpCell refers to a PCell of a primary cell group (master cell group, MCG) or a PSCell of a secondary cell group (secondary cell group, SCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • SpCell refers to PCell.
  • the MCG Refers to the primary cell group where the cell serving the terminal equipment in the primary base station is located. In the dual link mode, the MCG includes a group of serving cells associated with the MeNB, including the PCell and one or more SCells.
  • the SCG Refers to the group of the cell serving the terminal equipment in the secondary base station as the secondary cell group.
  • the SCG includes a PSCell and optionally one or more SCells.
  • MeNB The base station to which the terminal device under dual link resides.
  • the MeNB is configured to another base station or multiple base stations of a terminal device under dual link through RRC connection signaling.
  • the terminal device can also have a communication connection with a larger number of network devices at the same time and can send and receive data.
  • one network device may be responsible for the exchange of radio resource control messages with the terminal device and be responsible for Core network control plane entity interaction, then, the network equipment can be called MN, and the rest of the network equipment can be called SN.
  • the network device 220 may also be a primary base station or a primary node, and the network device 210 may be a secondary base station or a secondary node, which is not limited in this application.
  • the figure is only for ease of understanding, showing a wireless connection between two network devices and a terminal device, but this should not constitute any limitation to the scenarios applicable to this application.
  • the terminal device can also establish wireless links with more network devices, or the terminal device can also establish wireless links with fewer network devices.
  • the terminal device 230 may use the uplink resource for transmitting BFRQ
  • the upper sends a BFRQ to the network device 210 or the network device 220, and the network device 210 or the network device 220 sends the BFRR to the terminal device 230 after receiving the BFRQ.
  • the terminal device 230 can restore the second link through the network device 210.
  • Each communication device such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120 in FIG. 1, or the network device 210, the network device 220, or the terminal device 230 in FIG. 2, may be configured with multiple antennas.
  • the plurality of antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, multiple antenna technology can be used to communicate between network devices and terminal devices.
  • the above-mentioned communication system applicable to this application is only an example, and the communication system applicable to this application is not limited to this.
  • the number of network equipment and terminal equipment included in the communication system may also be other numbers, or a single base station or multi-carrier Aggregated scenarios, dual-link scenarios, or device-to-device (D2D) communication scenarios.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to one cell assisting another cell or multiple cells to restore links in a carrier aggregation scenario.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may be applied in a dual link scenario, where one cell in a cell group assists another cell or multiple cells to restore links.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may also be applied to a single carrier or carrier aggregation or dual link scenario, where a cell fails to restore the link of the cell on the resources of the cell.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application may be applicable to the case where the primary cell (PCell) is high frequency or low frequency, and the secondary cell (SCell) is high frequency or low frequency.
  • PCell primary cell
  • SCell secondary cell
  • the uplink resources of the PCell can be used to assist the SCell to restore the link.
  • low frequency and high frequency are relative terms, but also can be divided by a certain frequency, such as 6GHz.
  • CoMP coordinated multipoint transmission/reception
  • Control resource set (CORESET)
  • the control resource set is a resource set used to transmit downlink control information, and may also be referred to as a control resource region or a physical downlink control channel resource set.
  • the network device may configure one or more control resource sets for the terminal device to send a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the network device can send a control channel to the terminal device on any control resource set corresponding to the terminal device.
  • the network device also needs to notify the terminal device of other configurations associated with the control resource set, such as a search space set.
  • There are differences in the configuration information of each control resource set such as frequency domain width differences, time domain length differences, and so on.
  • control resource set in this application can be any of the following: CORESET, control region, or enhanced-physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH) set defined by the 5G mobile communication system (set).
  • CORESET CORESET
  • control region control region
  • ePDCCH enhanced-physical downlink control channel
  • the time-frequency position occupied by the PDCCH can be referred to as the downlink control region.
  • the PDCCH is always located in the first m symbols of a subframe, where the possible values of m are 1, 2, 3, or 4.
  • the positions of E-PDCCH and R-PDCCH are not in the first m symbols.
  • the downlink control area can be flexibly configured by RRC signaling through a control resource set (CORESET) and a search space set (search space set).
  • the control resource set can be configured with PDCCH or control channel element (control channel element, CCE) frequency domain position, time domain continuous symbol number and other information.
  • the search space set can be configured with PDCCH detection period and offset, starting symbol in a time slot and other information.
  • the search space set can be configured with a PDCCH cycle as 1 time slot, and the time domain start symbol is symbol 0, then the terminal device can detect the PDCCH at the start position of each time slot.
  • Spatial related parameter information may include quasi-collocation (QCL) information, and may also include spatial relationship (spatial relation) information.
  • QCL quasi-collocation
  • spatial relation spatial relationship
  • the QCL information is used to indicate the spatial correlation parameters of the downlink signal (may also be called spatial correlation characteristics)
  • spatial relation information is used to indicate the spatial correlation parameters of the uplink signal (may also be called spatial correlation characteristics).
  • the uplink signal includes but is not limited to: PUCCH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), sounding reference signal (SRS) and demodulation reference signal (DMRS).
  • PUCCH physical uplink shared channel
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • Downlink signals include but are not limited to: PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH), tracking reference signal (tracking reference signal, TRS), channel state information reference signal (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS), Cell-specific reference signal (CS-RS), UE-specific reference signal (user equipment specific reference signal, US-RS), demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS), and synchronization signal broadcast channel block (synchronization) signal/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block).
  • the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB) for short.
  • the SSB includes one or more of the following: primary synchronization signal (PSS), secondary synchronization signal (SSS), and PBCH. It is mainly used for cell search, cell synchronization, and signals carrying broadcast information.
  • the spatial relation information is used to assist in describing the beamforming information on the transmitting side of the terminal device and the transmission process.
  • the spatial relation information is used to indicate the spatial transmission parameter relationship between the two reference signals.
  • the target reference signal is generally a downlink signal, for example, DMRS or SRS.
  • the reference signal or source reference signal cited can generally be: CSI-RS, SRS, or SSB.
  • Quasi co-location can also be called quasi co-location or co-location.
  • QCL information may also be referred to as QCL hypothesis information.
  • QCL information is used to assist in describing the terminal equipment receiving beamforming information and the receiving process.
  • the QCL information can be used to indicate the QCL relationship between two reference signals.
  • the target reference signal is generally a downlink signal, such as DMRS or CSI-RS.
  • the reference signal or source reference signal cited can generally be: CSI-RS, SSB, or TRS, etc. TRS is also a type of CSI-RS.
  • the method for configuring the QCL information of the PDCCH may be as follows:
  • the K candidate QCL information may include, for example, K TCI-states, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the QCL information of the PDCCH is indicated through a media access control (Media Access Control, MAC) control element (CE) (MAC CE).
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • the terminal equipment assumes that the DMRS of the PDCCH and PDSCH are determined during initial access
  • the SSB is QCL.
  • the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with the QCL relationship may have the same or similar spatial characteristic parameters (or called parameters), or the spatial characteristic parameters (or called parameters) of an antenna port may be used to determine the relationship with the antenna
  • the spatial characteristic parameter (or called the parameter) difference is smaller than a certain threshold.
  • the spatial characteristic parameters of the two reference signals or channels that satisfy the QCL relationship are the same (or similar or similar), so that the spatial characteristic parameters of the target reference signal can be inferred based on the source reference signal resource index.
  • the spatial characteristic parameters of the two reference signals or channels that satisfy the spatial relationship information are the same (or similar or similar), so that the spatial characteristic parameters of the target reference signal can be inferred based on the source reference signal resource index .
  • the spatial characteristic parameters may include one or more of the following parameters:
  • Angle of incidence AoA
  • dominant (dominant) incidence angle AoA average incidence angle
  • power angular spectrum PAS
  • exit angle angle of departure, AoD
  • main exit angle Average exit angle, power angle spectrum of exit angle
  • terminal equipment transmit beamforming terminal equipment receive beamforming, spatial channel correlation, network equipment transmit beamforming, network equipment receive beamforming, average channel gain, average channel delay (average delay), delay spread (delay spread), Doppler spread (Doppler spread), Doppler shift (doppler shift), or spatial reception parameters (spatial Rx parameters), etc.
  • the above-mentioned angle may be: decomposition values of different dimensions, or a combination of decomposition values of different dimensions.
  • the antenna ports may be antenna ports with different antenna port numbers.
  • the antenna port may also be an antenna port that has the same antenna port number or different antenna port numbers, and transmits or receives information at different times.
  • the antenna port may also be an antenna port that has the same antenna port number or different antenna port numbers, and transmits or receives information in different frequencies.
  • the antenna port may also be an antenna port that has the same antenna port number or different antenna port numbers, and transmits or receives information in different code domain resources.
  • These spatial characteristic parameters describe the spatial channel characteristics between the antenna ports of the source reference signal and the target reference signal, and help the terminal device to complete the receiving-side beamforming or receiving process according to the QCL information.
  • the terminal device may receive the target reference signal according to the receiving beam information of the source reference signal indicated by the QCL information.
  • These spatial characteristic parameters also help the terminal device to complete the beamforming or transmission process at the transmitting side according to the spatial related information.
  • the terminal device may transmit the target reference signal according to the transmit beam information of the source reference signal indicated by the spatial related information.
  • the network device may indicate the demodulation reference signal of the PDCCH or PDSCH and one of the multiple reference signal resources previously reported by the terminal device. Or more satisfy the QCL relationship.
  • the reference signal may be CSI-RS.
  • Each reported CSI-RS resource index corresponds to a transmit and receive beam pair established during the previous measurement based on the CSI-RS resource. It should be understood that the receiving beam information of two reference signals or channels that satisfy the QCL relationship is the same, and the terminal device can infer the receiving beam information of receiving the PDCCH or PDSCH according to the reference signal resource index.
  • QCL relationships can be divided into the following four types based on different parameters:
  • Type A Doppler shift (Doppler shift), Doppler spread (Doppler spread), average delay (average delay), delay spread (delay spread);
  • Type B Doppler frequency shift, Doppler spread
  • Type C Doppler frequency shift, average delay
  • Type D Spatial Rx parameter.
  • the network device can configure one or more types of QCL for the terminal device at the same time, such as QCL type A+D, C+D, etc.
  • a QCL relationship refers to a QCL relationship of type D, it can be considered as an airspace QCL.
  • the antenna port When the antenna port satisfies the spatial QCL relationship, it may be a QCL relationship between a downlink signal port and a downlink signal port, or between an uplink signal port and an uplink signal port (referred to as spatial relation above).
  • the two signals may have the same AOA or AOD, which is used to indicate that they have the same receive beam or transmit beam.
  • the AOA and AOD of the two signals have a corresponding relationship
  • the AOD and AOD of the two signals have a corresponding relationship
  • the relationship is that the beam reciprocity can be used to determine the uplink transmit beam according to the downlink receive beam, or the downlink receive beam can be determined according to the uplink transmit beam.
  • the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, it can mean that the corresponding beam directions of the two antenna ports are spatially consistent. From the perspective of the receiving end, if the two antenna ports are spatial QCL, it can mean that the receiving end can receive the signals sent by the two antenna ports in the same beam direction.
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship may also have a corresponding beam, and the corresponding beam may include one or more of the following: the same receiving beam, the same transmitting beam, and the transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam (if corresponding In the scene with reciprocity), the receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam (for example, it can correspond to the scene with reciprocity).
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship can also be understood as using the same spatial filter to receive or transmit the signal.
  • the spatial filter may be one or more of the following: precoding, weights of antenna ports, phase deflection of antenna ports, or amplitude gain of antenna ports.
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship can also be understood as having a corresponding beam pair link (BPL).
  • the corresponding BPL includes one or more of the following: the same downlink BPL, the same uplink BPL, and The uplink BPL corresponding to the downlink BPL, or the downlink BPL corresponding to the uplink BPL.
  • the spatial reception parameter (ie, QCL of type D) can be understood as a parameter for indicating the direction information of the reception beam.
  • scenario applicable to QCL assumptions in this application may also be two reference signals, or may also be an association relationship between transmission objects.
  • Transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state (TCI-state)
  • TCI-state can be used to indicate the QCL information of a signal or channel.
  • the channel may be, for example, PDCCH, CORESET, or PDSCH.
  • the signal may be, for example, CSI-RS, DMRS, or TRS.
  • TCI information can mean that the reference signal included in the TCI meets the QCL relationship with the channel, and is mainly used to indicate that when the channel is received, its spatial characteristic parameters and other information are the same, similar, or similar to the spatial characteristic parameters of the reference signal included in the TCI .
  • TCI information can also mean that the reference signal included in the TCI meets the QCL relationship with the signal, and is mainly used to indicate that when the signal is received, its spatial characteristic parameters and other information are the same, similar, or similar to those of the reference signal included in the TCI. similar.
  • a TCI-state can be configured with one or more reference signals that are referenced and the associated QCL type (QCL type).
  • QCL type can include one or two reference signal resource identifiers, And the associated QCL type.
  • QCL types can be divided into four categories: type A, type B, type C, and type D, which are different combinations or choices of ⁇ Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, and spatial Rx parameter ⁇ .
  • TCI-state includes QCL information, or TCI-state is used to indicate QCL information.
  • TCI-state is configured by network equipment to each terminal device.
  • the following is a format of TCI-state.
  • TCI-state can be configured globally. In TCI-states configured for different cells and different bandwidth parts (bandwidth parts, BWP), if the indexes of the TCI-states are the same, the corresponding TCI-state configurations are also the same.
  • BWP bandwidth parts
  • a component carrier can also be called a component carrier, a component carrier, or a component carrier.
  • Each carrier in multi-carrier aggregation can be called "CC".
  • the terminal device can receive data on multiple CCs.
  • Each carrier is composed of one or more physical resource blocks (PRB), and each carrier can have its own corresponding PDCCH to schedule the PDSCH of its respective CC; or, some carriers do not have PDCCH, in this case the carrier can be Perform cross-carrier scheduling (cross-carrier scheduling).
  • PRB physical resource blocks
  • a network device sends a PDCCH on one CC to schedule data transmission on another CC, that is, transmits PDSCH on another CC, or transmits PUSCH on another CC. More specifically, the network device may send the PDCCH on the bandwidth part (BWP) of one CC to schedule the transmission of the PDSCH or PUSCH of the BWP on the other CC. That is, the control channel is transmitted on one CC, and the corresponding data channel is transmitted on another CC.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • the beam is a communication resource.
  • the beam can be a wide beam, or a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
  • the beam forming technology can be beamforming technology or other technical means.
  • the beamforming technology can be specifically: digital beamforming technology, analog beamforming technology, and hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources. The same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
  • multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics may be regarded as one beam.
  • One beam corresponds to one or more antenna ports, which are used to transmit data channels, control channels, and sounding signals.
  • One or more antenna ports corresponding to a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
  • the beam used to transmit a signal can be called a transmission beam (Tx beam), can be called a spatial domain transmission filter or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial transmission parameter); the beam used to receive a signal can be called To receive the beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it may be called a spatial domain receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial RX parameter).
  • the transmitting beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions in space after a signal is transmitted through the antenna
  • the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space.
  • Beams can be divided into: transmitting and receiving beams of network equipment, and transmitting and receiving beams of terminal equipment.
  • the transmitting beam of the network device is used to describe the beamforming information on the transmitting side of the network device
  • the receiving beam of the network device is used to describe the beamforming information on the receiving side of the network device.
  • the transmitting beam of the terminal device is used to describe the beamforming information on the transmitting side of the terminal device
  • the receiving beam of the terminal device is used to describe the beamforming information on the receiving side of the terminal device. That is, beams can be used to describe beamforming information.
  • Beams generally correspond to resources, and beams can correspond to time resources, space resources, and frequency domain resources.
  • the beam may also correspond to a reference signal resource (for example, a reference signal resource for beamforming), or beamforming information.
  • a reference signal resource for example, a reference signal resource for beamforming
  • the beam may also correspond to information associated with the reference signal resource of the network device.
  • the reference signal may be, for example, CSI-RS, SSB, DMRS, phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), or TRS.
  • the information associated with the reference signal resource may be the reference signal resource identifier, or QCL information (such as QCL of type D).
  • the reference signal resource identifier corresponds to a transceiver beam pair established during the previous measurement based on the reference signal resource, and the terminal device can infer beam information through the reference signal resource index.
  • the beam may also correspond to a spatial filter (spatial filter or spatial domain filter) and a spatial domain transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter).
  • a spatial filter spatial filter or spatial domain filter
  • a spatial domain transmission filter spatial domain transmission filter
  • the receive beam can be equivalent to a spatial transmission filter, a spatial transmission filter, a spatial receive filter, and a spatial receive filter;
  • the transmit beam can be equivalent to a spatial filter, a spatial transmission filter, a spatial transmit filter, and a spatial transmit filter.
  • the information of spatial related parameters can be equivalent to a spatial filter (spatial dimain transmission/receive filter).
  • the spatial filter generally includes a spatial transmission filter and/or a spatial reception filter.
  • the spatial filter can also be called a spatial transmission filter, a spatial reception filter, a spatial transmission filter, a spatial transmission filter and so on.
  • the receiving beam on the terminal device side and the transmitting beam on the network device side may be downlink spatial filters, and the transmitting beam on the terminal device side and the receiving beam on the network device side may be uplink spatial filters.
  • the antenna port may also be referred to as a port.
  • the transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving end device, or the transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal port.
  • the system can configure the corresponding bandwidth for each terminal device.
  • This part of the bandwidth configured for the terminal device is called BWP, and the terminal device is on its own BWP transmission.
  • the BWP may be a set of continuous frequency domain resources on the carrier, such as a physical resource block (PRB), and the frequency domain resources that can be occupied by different BWPs may partially overlap (overlap) or may not overlap each other.
  • Bandwidths of frequency domain resources occupied by different BWPs may be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the minimum granularity of BWP in the frequency domain can be 1 PRB.
  • a terminal device may have only one active BWP at a time, and the terminal device only receives data/reference signals or sends data/reference signals on the active BWP (active BWP).
  • a specific BWP can also be a collection of bandwidth on a specific frequency, or a collection of multiple resource blocks (RB), etc., and this is not done limited.
  • Reference signal configured to detect link failure and restore link failure
  • Communication systems usually use two types of reference signals: one type of reference signal is used to estimate the channel, so that the received signal containing control information or data can be coherently demodulated, and the other type of reference signal is used to measure the channel state or channel quality , So as to realize the scheduling of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment obtains channel state information (CSI) based on the channel quality measurement of the CSI-RS.
  • CSI includes one or more of the following: rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), precoding indicator (precoding matrix indicator, PMI), or channel quality indicator (channel quality indicator, CQI). This information can be sent to the network device by the terminal device through the physical uplink control channel or the physical uplink shared channel.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device a reference signal (beam failure detection RS) resource (also referred to as a reference signal resource for link failure detection) for beam failure detection.
  • beam failure detection RS beam failure detection resource
  • the network device can indicate through one or more of the following signaling: RRC, media access control control element (MAC-CE), or DCI signaling to indicate the configured link failure detection reference signal Resource collection.
  • RRC resource control control element
  • MAC-CE media access control control element
  • DCI DCI signaling
  • the reference signal for beam failure detection can also be indicated implicitly, for example, the reference signal associated in the TCI indicating the PDCCH is used as the reference signal for beam failure detection, and the reference signal is a reference signal that satisfies the QCL relationship with the DMRS of the PDCCH , And is the reference signal sent periodically.
  • the terminal device may detect the beam failure according to the beam failure detection reference signal resource set; when the network device does not display the configuration for beam failure detection When the reference signal resource is set, the terminal device may fail to detect the beam according to the reference signal indicated in the above implicit manner.
  • the network device can also indicate to the terminal device the candidate reference signal resource set (candidate beam RS list or candidate beam RS identification resource or beam failure candidate beam resource or candidate beam identification) for recovering the link between the terminal device and the network device.
  • RS or candidate beam list also called a candidate reference signal resource set or a link failure recovery reference signal resource set).
  • the terminal device can select channel quality information (such as reference signal receiving power (RSRP), channel quality indicator (CQI), and block error rate (block error rate) from the set of candidate reference signal resources.
  • error ratio, BLER), signal to interference plus noise ratio (signal to interference plus noise ratio, SINR), signal to noise ratio (signal noise ratio, SNR), etc.) are reference signal resources that are higher than a predetermined threshold, used to restore the communication link .
  • the candidate beam identification RS is used by the terminal device to initiate a link reconfiguration reference signal set after the terminal device determines that the transmission beam of the network device has a beam failure.
  • the names of the reference signal resource set used for beam failure detection and the reference signal resource set used to restore the link between the terminal device and the network device may also have other names. This is not specifically limited.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the reference signal resource used for beam failure detection, the candidate reference signal resource set used to restore the link between the terminal device and the network device, and how to detect and restore.
  • beam failure may also be referred to as communication failure, beam failure, link failure, link failure, communication failure, communication failure, communication link failure, communication link failure, and so on. In the embodiments of this application, these concepts have the same meaning.
  • beam failure recovery can also be referred to as recovery of communication between network equipment and terminal equipment, communication failure recovery, beam failure recovery, beam recovery, link failure recovery, link failure recovery, link recovery, and communication failure recovery , Communication failure recovery, communication link failure recovery, communication link failure recovery, communication recovery, link reconfiguration, etc.
  • beam failure recovery request information (beam failure recovery request, BFRQ) can also be referred to as communication failure recovery request information, beam failure recovery request information, beam recovery request information, link failure recovery request information, link failure Recovery request information, link failure Recovery request information, link recovery request information, communication failure recovery request information, communication recovery request information, communication link failure recovery request information, communication link failure recovery request information, link reconfiguration request information , Reconfiguration request information, etc.
  • the beam failure recovery request may refer to sending a signal on the resource used to carry the communication failure recovery request.
  • beam failure recovery response can also be referred to as communication failure recovery response information, beam failure recovery response information, beam failure response information, beam failure response information, beam failure response information, beam recovery response, chain Path failure recovery response information, link failure recovery response information, link failure response information, link failure response information, link recovery response information, communication failure recovery response information, communication failure response information, communication failure response information, communication recovery response information, communication recovery response Information, communication link failure recovery response information, communication link failure response information, communication link response information, link reconfiguration response information, reconfiguration response information, etc. .
  • the beam failure recovery response information may be simply referred to as response information.
  • the beam failure recovery response information may refer to the reception of a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) on the control resource set and/or search space set used to send the communication failure recovery response.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the beam failure recovery response information can also be scrambled by other information (such as BFR-RNTI scrambled).
  • DCI the beam failure recovery response information may also be data scheduled by the foregoing DCI, and the beam failure recovery response information may also be an ACK of the data scheduled by the foregoing DCI.
  • the beam failure recovery response information can also be one of the following information: C-RNTI scrambled DCI, modulation and coding scheme (Modulation and Coding Scheme, MCS) cell-specific wireless network temporary identifier MCS-C-RNTI scrambled DCI ,
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • link recovery failure can be understood as the terminal device no longer sending link failure recovery request information, it can also be understood as stopping the link failure recovery clock timing, or it can be understood as stopping the link failure recovery counter. Counting etc.
  • the beam training process may include the following processes.
  • a BPL may include a transmit beam of a network device and a receive beam of a terminal device, or a BPL may include a transmit beam of a terminal device and a receive beam of a network device.
  • the terminal device realizes the selection of the transmission beam of the network device and/or the reception beam of the terminal device based on the beam scanning of the network device, and the network device realizes the transmission beam of the terminal device and/or the reception of the network device based on the beam scanning of the terminal device Choice of beam.
  • the downlink combined TRP and UE beam refinement as shown in (1) in Figure 3, or the uplink combined TRP and terminal equipment beam refinement as shown in (2) in Figure 3 Refinement (UL TRP and UE beam refinement).
  • the transmitting beam may be a transmitting beam of a network device or a transmitting beam of a terminal device.
  • the transmit beam is the transmit beam of the network device, as shown in (5) in Figure 3, the downlink TRP beam refinement (DL TRP beam refinement), the network device uses different transmit beam directions
  • the terminal device sends the reference signal, and the terminal device receives the reference signal sent by the network device through different transmission beams through the same receiving beam, and determines the optimal transmission beam of the network device based on the received signal. Then the terminal device feeds back the optimal transmit beam of the network device to the network device, so that the network device can update the transmit beam.
  • DL TRP beam refinement downlink TRP beam refinement
  • the transmit beam is the transmit beam of the terminal device, as shown in (4) in Figure 3, the beam refinement of the uplink terminal device (UL UE beam refinement), the terminal device transmits through different The beam sends a reference signal to the network device, and the network device receives the reference signal sent by the terminal device through different transmitting beams through the same receiving beam, and determines the optimal transmitting beam of the terminal device based on the received signal. Then the optimal transmit beam of the terminal device is fed back to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can update the transmit beam.
  • the foregoing process of sending reference signals through different transmit beams may be called beam scanning, and the process of determining the optimal transmit beam based on the received signal may be called beam matching.
  • the receiving beam may be a receiving beam of a network device or a receiving beam of a terminal device.
  • the receiving beam is the receiving beam of a network device, as shown in (6) in Figure 3, the uplink TRP beam refinement (UL TRP beam refinement), the terminal device uses the same transmit beam direction
  • the network device sends the reference signal, and the network device uses different receiving beams to receive the reference signal sent by the terminal device. Then the network device determines the optimal receiving beam of the network device based on the received signal, so as to update the receiving beam of the network device.
  • the receiving beam is the receiving beam of the terminal device, as shown in (3) in Figure 3, the beam refinement of the downlink terminal device (DL UE beam refinement), the network device transmits through the same The beam sends the reference signal to the terminal device, and the terminal device uses different receiving beams to receive the reference signal sent by the network device. Then, the terminal device determines the optimal receiving beam of the terminal device based on the received signal to update the receiving beam of the terminal device.
  • DL UE beam refinement downlink terminal device
  • both the transmitting beam of the network device and the receiving beam of the terminal device may dynamically change, and the optimal receiving beam determined by the terminal device based on the received signal may include multiple.
  • the terminal device may feed back information of multiple receiving beams to the network device.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device the receiving beam of the terminal device by sending beam indication information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device adopts beamforming in the analog domain, the terminal device can accurately determine the receiving beam of the terminal device based on the beam indication information sent by the network device, thereby saving the beam scanning time of the terminal device and achieving the effect of power saving.
  • the network equipment obtains N BPLs with better communication with the terminal equipment, and the BPL includes ⁇ Bx, B’x> and ⁇ By, B’y>.
  • Bx represents the transmitting beam of the network device
  • B'x represents the receiving beam of the terminal device
  • B'y represents the receiving beam of the network device.
  • the network equipment and terminal equipment will use these N BPLs for data transmission.
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of a link failure recovery process. As shown in Figure 4, the following steps can be included.
  • the beam fails to be detected.
  • the terminal device measures the beam failure detection RS set (beam failure detection RS set) to determine that the link between the terminal device and the network device fails.
  • beam failure detection RS set beam failure detection RS set
  • the terminal device determines the link failure with the network device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. For example, when the terminal device judges that the channel quality information of all or part of the reference signal in the beam failure detection RS or beam failure detection RS set is less than or equal to the link failure detection threshold, the terminal device It can be determined that the link between the terminal device and the network device has failed.
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the terminal device can identify the reference signal in the candidate reference signal set (candidate beam identification RS), and the terminal device can restore the link based on the reference signal.
  • the process of the terminal device identifying the reference signal can be understood as the terminal device determining a reference signal (new identified beam) whose channel quality is greater than or equal to the link failure recovery threshold in the candidate reference signal set.
  • the terminal device sends link failure recovery request information to the network device.
  • the network device sends link failure recovery response information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can send beam failure recovery request (BFRQ) information to the network device, and the terminal device can indicate to the network device information such as cell information of the link failure cell through the BFRQ information .
  • BFRQ beam failure recovery request
  • the network device Before the terminal device sends the link failure recovery request information, the network device cannot know how many cells have link failures. Therefore, resources are generally reserved according to the maximum number of possible link failure cells.
  • terminal equipment reports BFRQ information through MAC-CE.
  • the MAC-CE indicating link failure recovery request information may indicate cell information of multiple link failure cells.
  • the terminal device determines that only one or a few of the configured cells have a link failure and needs to send the link failure recovery request information, it will cause a waste of resources.
  • this application proposes a method that can allocate resources reasonably and reduce waste of resources.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a method 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 500 may include the following steps.
  • the terminal device determines that the link of at least one cell has failed. In other words, the terminal device determines that the link of one or more cells has failed, or in other words, the terminal device detects that one or more cells have a link failure.
  • the reason for the link failure is not limited in the embodiment of this application. For example, when the beam is blocked or the signal quality deteriorates, the link may fail.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device judges the channel quality of the reference signal used to detect the beam failure detection of the cell, or when the terminal device judges the channel quality of all or part of the reference signal in the set of reference signals used to detect the beam failure detection of the cell
  • N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the preset threshold, or the link failure detection threshold, or the link failure threshold may be a pre-configured or predefined threshold, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the reference signal in the reference signal set used for beam failure detection satisfies the QCL relationship with the demodulation reference signal of the PDCCH, or uses the same TCI state as the PDCCH.
  • the channel quality information such as RSRP, CQI, BLER, SINR, SNR, etc.
  • the beam failure detection threshold may also be called a predetermined threshold, may also be called a link failure detection threshold, and may also be called a link failure threshold. It should be understood that any threshold used for link failure detection can be the beam failure detection threshold, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the name of the beam failure detection threshold.
  • the beam failure detection threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be the same threshold as the radio link failure OOS (out of sync) threshold.
  • the network device when the network device is configured with a beam failure detection threshold, use the beam failure detection threshold to detect beam failure; when the network device is not configured with a beam failure detection threshold, the wireless link out-of-synchronization threshold can be used as the beam failure detection threshold detection The beam failed.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner in which the terminal device determines the link failure with the cell, and any manner that can cause the terminal device to determine the link failure with the cell is applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device sends first indication information to the network device, where the first indication information indicates information of the link failure cell, where the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information to the network device, and the network device can restore the cell where the link fails according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device sending the first indication information to the network device may be the terminal device sending the first indication information to the network device where the link failure occurs, and the link between the terminal device and the network device is restored through the network device failure.
  • the terminal device sends the first instruction information to the network device, or the terminal device sends the first instruction information to another network device, and the link between the terminal device and the network device fails to recover through the other network device.
  • the information of the link failure cell may include: identification information of the link failure cell, and/or reference signal information, where the reference signal information is used to restore the link of the link failure cell.
  • the reference signal information and the identification information of the link failure cell may be sent to the network device separately, or may be sent to the network device in a unified manner through the first indication information.
  • the information of the link failure cell may include the identification information of the link failure cell; or the information of the link failure cell may include reference signal information; or the information of the link failure cell may include the identification information of the link failure cell and Reference signal information.
  • the first indication information may indicate the identification information of the link failure cell; or, the first indication information may indicate the reference signal information; or, the first indication information may indicate the identification information and reference signal information of the link failure cell.
  • the reference signal information may include the reference signal resource index and/or the channel quality of the reference signal (such as one or more of the following: RSRP, SINR, RSRQ, CQI, or SNR, etc.).
  • the reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources and/or SSB resources.
  • Reference signal information can be understood as reference signal resource information.
  • the reference signal resource information includes the index of the reference signal resource and/or the channel quality of the reference signal on the reference signal resource (such as one or more of the following: RSRP, SINR, RSRQ , CQI, or SNR, etc.).
  • the first indication information may be MAC-CE, that is, BFRQ information may be indicated through MAC-CE.
  • the first instruction information is used in the following to express.
  • the first indication information indicates the information of the link failure cell, which may include: the first indication information indicates the identity (ID) of the link failure cell (or referred to as index (ID)),
  • ID the identity of the link failure cell
  • the cell ID will be used as an example.
  • the terminal device may indicate the information of the first cell and the second cell to the network device, such as the ID of the first cell and the ID of the second cell.
  • the terminal device sends the first indication information to the network device, so that the network device can learn which cells have link failures.
  • the number of cells with link failures reported by the terminal device may be less than or equal to the number of cells with link failures detected.
  • the terminal device determines that the link of T1 cells has failed.
  • the first indication message sent by the terminal device may carry the information of T2 cells, such as the identification of T2 cells ( Or called index (index, ID)).
  • T1 and T2 are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and T1 is greater than or equal to T2.
  • the number of cells with link failure reported by the terminal device is equal to the number of cells with link failure detected as an example.
  • the first indication information indicates the information of the link-failed cell, which may include: the first indication information indicates the reference signal information, that is, the first indication information may also report the new information of the cell that has recovered the link failure.
  • Link information indicates the reference signal information.
  • the reference signal information is used to restore the link of the cell where the link fails.
  • the first indication information may indicate T3 reference signal information for restoring links of T2 cells. Among them, T3 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • condition of the link failure cell may include one or more of the following: the number of link failure cells, the information payload of the link failure cell, and whether the link is identified for restoring the link The situation of the reference signal of the failed cell, etc.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, and may include:
  • Solution 1 The format of the first indication information is determined based on the link failure cell; and/or,
  • Solution 2 The resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the network device restores the link of the cell where the link fails based on the first indication information.
  • the network device After receiving the first indication information, the network device restores the links of part or all of the cells of the link failure cell indicated in the first indication information.
  • the terminal device reports the link failure of T2 cells through the first indication information, and then the network device restores the links of T4 cells after receiving the first indication information.
  • the T4 cells belong to T2 cells, T4 is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T4 is less than or equal to T2.
  • Solution 1 The format of the first indication information is determined based on the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information may be the first format or the second format.
  • the first format may be referred to as a short format, and the second format may be referred to as a long format; alternatively, the first format may be referred to as a single entry, and the second format may be referred to as a multi-entry.
  • first format, short format, or single entry is only a naming, and does not limit the scope of protection of the embodiments of this application;
  • second format, long format, or multiple entries are only a naming, and It does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the following is unified in the first format and the second format.
  • the first format and the second format meet one or more of the following conditions:
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; or,
  • the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells
  • the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, where N1 and N2 are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • N1 ⁇ N2 in other words, the number of link failure cells indicated by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of link failure cells indicated by the first indication information in the second format; or,
  • the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is smaller than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the above-mentioned number of bits, the number of information of the link failure cell, and the load may all refer to the maximum value.
  • the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells, which means that the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells at most.
  • first indication information can be predefined, for example, two formats (first format and second format) Therefore, it is possible to select the first indication information in a suitable format according to the condition of the link failure cell, and reduce the waste of resources.
  • the following respectively introduces the case where the format of the first indication information is the first format and the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format.
  • the first indication information in the first format may include one or more of the following: serving cell identification field (serving cell ID field), first field, second field, or reserved bits.
  • the serving cell ID field can indicate the cell ID of the link failure through the state value.
  • serving cell ID field is only a naming and does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of this application, and the embodiments of this application do not exclude the use of other names in future protocols to represent the same meaning.
  • the following description uses the serving cell ID field.
  • the first indication information in the first format may report the cell ID of the link failure in the form of a state value.
  • the first indication information includes a serving cell ID field, and the serving cell ID field indicates the cell ID of the link failure in a state value manner.
  • the first indication information includes an SCellIndex field, and the SCellIndex field indicates the ID of the serving cell whose link fails in a state value manner.
  • the serving cell ID field may be called ServCellIndex field or SCellIndex field.
  • X serving cells configured by a network device for a certain terminal device (that is, there are at most X), or a network device is configured with a total of X serving cells that require link failure detection for a certain terminal device, or network device configuration
  • the serving cell identity field passes A bit indicates which of these cells has a link failure.
  • X is an integer greater than or equal to 1, It means that log2(X) is rounded up. It should be understood that the rounding method here can also be rounding down or rounding.
  • the first domain may also be referred to as the B domain, and the B domain indicates whether there is a corresponding second domain in the link failure cell indicated by the corresponding serving cell ID domain.
  • the B domain Take the B domain as an example below.
  • first domain and the B domain are only a kind of naming, and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not exclude the use of other names to represent the same meaning in future agreements. Use the B domain description below.
  • the second field may also be referred to as a new beam information (new beam info) field
  • the new beam info field indicates information used to restore the reference signal of the link of the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • the new beaminfo may be a reference signal resource index.
  • the second domain and the new beam info domain are only a kind of naming and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of this application, and the embodiments of this application do not exclude the use of other names to represent the same meaning in future agreements.
  • the following uses the new beam info field to describe.
  • the information of the reference signal includes the reference signal resource index and/or the channel quality of the reference signal.
  • the channel quality may include one or more of the following: reference signal receiving power (RSRP), signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), reference signal receiving quality (reference signal) receiving quality, RSRQ), channel quality indication (CQI), or signal-to-noise ratio (signal noise ratio, SNR), etc.
  • the reference signal resource may be one reference signal resource or multiple reference signal resources in the candidate reference signal resource set.
  • the B field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell ID field has a corresponding new beam info field. It can be understood that the B field indicates whether there is a new beam info field, or in other words, the B field indicates whether there is a link for recovery In other words, the B field indicates whether there is a reference signal resource for link recovery.
  • Each cell indicated in the serving cell ID field can have a corresponding B field.
  • a cell with a link failure corresponds to 1 bit in the B field, or a cell with a link failure corresponds to a 1-bit B field.
  • the link failure cell includes the first cell and the second cell, and the link failure of the first cell and the second cell is indicated through the serving cell identification field.
  • the B field corresponding to the first cell indicates whether the first cell has a second field
  • the B field corresponding to the second cell indicates whether the second cell has a second field.
  • the first indication information in the first format can contain at most two bytes (the first byte and the second byte), where the first byte includes the B field (the first byte may also include the serving cell identification field) .
  • the B field is 0, the content of the second byte does not exist, or the content of the second byte is the same as the content of the first byte, or the new beam info field does not exist in the second byte; when the B field is 1, the The two-byte content exists, or the new beam info field exists in the second byte.
  • the B field is 1, the content of the second byte does not exist, or the content of the second byte is the same as the content of the first byte, or the new beam info field does not exist in the second byte; when B When the field is 0, the content of the second byte exists, or the new beam info field exists in the second byte.
  • one octet represents a byte (byte) composed of 8 bits (bits).
  • Figure 6 or Figure 7 includes two Octs, which are marked as Oct for distinction. 1.
  • Oct 2 As shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 7, the MAC-CE includes two bytes, the first byte Oct 1 and the second byte Oct 2.
  • the content of the second byte exists, or the second byte exists in the new beam info field.
  • first byte and the second byte are only names for distinguishing, and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the relationship between the serving cell ID field, the B field, and the new beam info field can be: the serving cell ID field indicates the ID of a link failure cell, and the B field indicates whether the cell has new The beam info field, the new beam info field indicates the information of the reference signal used to restore the cell link.
  • the serving cell ID field there may be a B field corresponding to the cell to indicate whether the cell has a new beam info field, and the new beam info field indicates a reference signal used to restore the cell link Information.
  • the reserved bit (R bit) is generally set to 0.
  • the R bit generally does not indicate any information.
  • the foregoing exemplarily introduces the content that can be included when the first indication information is in the first format. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. In addition, when the first indication information is in the first format, there may be multiple forms. In the following, the first indication information is the MAC-CE, and several situations are exemplified.
  • the serving cell ID is the serving cell ID.
  • the MAC-CE can be at least any one of the forms shown in Example 1 and Example 2.
  • Example 1 Table 1 and Figure 6 show a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is no B field in this format.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field, a new beam info field, and reserved bits.
  • Serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the cell where the link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 6 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • R stands for reserved bits and is generally set to "0".
  • Example 2 Table 2 and Figure 7 show a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is a B field in the format.
  • one Oct represents one byte composed of 8 bits.
  • Figure 7 includes two Octs, which are marked as Oct 1 and Oct 2 for distinction.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field, a new beam info field, a B field, and reserved bits.
  • Serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the cell where the link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • Field B occupies 1 bit: indicates whether the reference signal of the cell whose link indicated by the service cell ID field is restored exists. Further, if the B field is "1", it means that there is a new beam info field. If the B field is "0", it means that the new beam info field does not exist.
  • the meanings of the values "1" and "0" are only examples, and the application is not limited thereto.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 6 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • R stands for reserved bit, which is generally set to "0".
  • Case 2 X is less than or equal to 8, and the maximum number of reference signal resources in the candidate beam list used to restore a cell link is 16, then the MAC-CE of the first format can occupy one byte.
  • the MAC-CE can be at least any one of the forms shown in Example 3 and Example 4.
  • Example 3 Table 3 and Figure 8 show a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is no B field in this format.
  • one Oct represents one byte composed of 8 bits
  • Figure 8 includes one Oct, which is marked as Oct 1.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field, a new beam info field, and reserved bits.
  • Serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the cell whose link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 4 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • R stands for reserved bit, which is generally set to "0".
  • Example 4 Table 4 and Figure 9 show a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is a B field in this format.
  • one Oct represents one byte composed of 8 bits
  • Figure 9 includes one Oct, denoted as Oct 1.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field, a new beaminfo field, and a B field.
  • Serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the cell whose link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • Field B occupies 1 bit: indicates whether the reference signal of the cell whose link indicated by the service cell ID field is restored exists. Further, if the B field is "1", it means that there is a new beam info field. If the B field is "0", it means that the new beam info field does not exist.
  • the meanings of the values "1" and "0" are only examples, and the application is not limited thereto.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 4 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • Case 3 X is less than or equal to 8.
  • the maximum number of reference signal resources in the candidate beam list used to restore a cell link is 32, then the MAC-CE of the first format can occupy one byte.
  • the MAC-CE can be at least in the form shown in Example 5.
  • Example 5 shows a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is no B field in this format. Alternatively, it may be as shown in FIG. 10.
  • one Oct represents one byte composed of 8 bits, and Figure 10 includes one Oct, which is marked as Oct1.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field and a new beam info field.
  • Serving cell identification field indicates the ID of the cell where the link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 5 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link corresponding to the serving cell identification field.
  • Case 4 X is less than or equal to 16, and the maximum number of reference signal resources in the candidate beam list used to restore a cell link is 16, then the MAC-CE of the first format can occupy one byte.
  • the MAC-CE can be at least in the form shown in Example 6.
  • Example 6 Table 6 and Figure 11 show a possible MAC CE format that uses MAC-CE to indicate BFRQ information, and there is no B field in this format.
  • one Oct represents one byte composed of 8 bits, and Figure 11 includes one Oct, denoted as Oct1.
  • the MAC-CE may include a serving cell ID field and a new beam info field.
  • Serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the cell where the link indicated by the MAC-CE fails.
  • the new beam info field which occupies 4 bits: indicates the reference signal resource index of the cell that failed to restore the link indicated by the serving cell ID field.
  • the format of the first indication information is the second format.
  • the first indication information in the second format may include one or more of the following: serving cell ID field, B field, new beaminfo field, or reserved bits.
  • the serving cell ID field can indicate the ID of the cell where the link fails through a bitmap.
  • Each bit of the bitmap can correspond to a Ci field. Assuming the value of the Ci field is 1, it means that the cell corresponding to the Ci field has a link failure. Then, if the serving cell ID field indicates the ID of T2 link failure cells, it can be understood that there are T2 in the serving cell ID field The value of the Ci field is 1.
  • the C 0 domain can be an R domain.
  • the first indication information in the second format may report the cell ID of the link failure by means of a bitmap.
  • the first indication information includes an indication field, such as a Ci field.
  • the Ci field indicates the ID of the cell where the link fails (or the ID of the SCell where the link fails, or the ID of the serving cell where the link fails) through a bitmap.
  • the Ci domain is only a naming for distinguishing, and does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application, where i is an integer greater than 0 or equal to 0.
  • the Ci field when the Ci field is 1, it indicates that the cell with cell ID i has a link failure, or indicates that SCellIndex i has a link failure, or indicates that ServCellIndex i has a link failure, or indicates a cell that needs link failure detection.
  • a link failure occurs in the i-th cell in, or a link failure occurs in the i-th cell in the activated cells, or a link failure occurs in the i-th cell in the serving cells configured by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the Ci field may also indicate whether the new beam info field corresponding to the cell with ID i exists. For example, when the Ci field is 1, it indicates that the new beam info field corresponding to the cell with ID i exists. Or the Ci field can also indicate that the new beam info field corresponding to SCellIndex i exists, or the new beam info field corresponding to ServCellIndex i exists, or the new beam info field corresponding to the i-th cell among the cells that require link failure detection exists.
  • the new beam info field corresponding to the i-th cell in the activated cell exists, or the new beam info field corresponding to the i-th cell in the serving cell that the network device is configured to the terminal device exists; when the Ci field is 0, it indicates The new beam info field corresponding to the cell with ID i does not exist, or indicates that the new beam info field corresponding to SCellIndex i does not exist, or indicates that the new beam info field corresponding to ServCellIndex i does not exist, or indicates that the link failure detection is required in the cell
  • the new beam info field corresponding to the i-th cell does not exist, or the new beam info field corresponding to the i-th cell in the activated cell does not exist, or it indicates that the network device is configured to the i-th cell in the serving cell of the terminal device
  • the corresponding new beam info domain does not exist.
  • X serving cells configured by a network device for a certain terminal device
  • X serving cells for link failure recovery.
  • i can be greater than or equal to 1, and i less than or equal to X.
  • X bits can be used to indicate which of these cells have a link failure.
  • the domain included in the first indication information in the second format may include the following situations.
  • the first indication information in the second format may include: X Ci fields and m second fields. Among them, there are a total of m Ci domains with a value of 1 in the X Ci domains, and the m Ci domains with a value of 1 correspond one-to-one with the m second domains. m is an integer less than or equal to X.
  • the first indication information in the second format may include: X Ci fields, b first fields, and m second fields. Among them, there are a total of b Ci domains with a value of 1 in the X Ci domains, and the b Ci domains with a value of 1 correspond one-to-one with the b first domains; in the b first domains, there are a total of m first domains. The value is 1, and the m first domains with the value 1 correspond to the m second domains one-to-one.
  • b is an integer less than or equal to X
  • m is an integer less than or equal to b.
  • the first indication information in the second format may include: X Ci fields, X first fields, and m second fields.
  • the X Ci domains correspond to the X first domains one-to-one.
  • the m Ci domains with a value of 1 correspond to the first domain and the m second domains one-to-one.
  • m1 and m2 are integers less than or equal to X.
  • m1 and m2 are integers greater than or equal to m.
  • X 31
  • 31 bits are used to indicate the cell ID of the link failure.
  • the C5 field and the C7 field are both 1, indicating that the cell with the cell ID of 5 and the cell with the cell ID of 7 have link failure.
  • the first indication information format as the description in the first format (ie, the description of the first format in "1)" above), here No longer.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the IDs of m cells (it can be understood that there are m Ci fields in the serving cell ID field with a value of 1), which can be understood as link failures in the m cells, where m is greater than 1 or An integer equal to 1.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the IDs of m cells, and correspondingly, the m cells correspond to m second fields.
  • FIG. 12 includes a reserved field R, and FIG. 12 may include m second domains, which are respectively denoted as second domain 1, second domain 2,...
  • the C 0 domain may be an R domain, that is, the C 0 domain may include reserved fields.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the IDs of (m+1) cells (it can be understood that there are (m+1) Ci fields in the serving cell ID field with a value of 1), which can be understood as the (m+1) cells A link failure has occurred.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the ID of the (m+1) cell, and correspondingly, the (m+1) cells correspond to (m+1) second fields.
  • Fig. 13 does not include the reserved field R
  • Fig. 13 may include (m+1) second fields, which are marked as second field a0, second field a1, second field a2, and second field for distinction.
  • Two domains am... Among them, the C 0 domain may be an R domain, that is, the C 0 domain may include reserved fields.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the IDs of p1 cells (it can be understood that there are p1 Ci fields in the serving cell ID field with a value of 1), which can be understood as link failures in the p1 cells, where p1 is greater than 1 or An integer equal to 1.
  • the serving cell ID field indicates the IDs of p1 cells.
  • the p1 cells may correspond to p2 first domains (Bi domains), where p2 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • p2 may be equal to p1
  • the B bj field corresponds to the j-th cell among the cells whose link fails indicated by the serving cell ID field
  • B bj may be equal to B j
  • p2 may be equal to X
  • the B bj domain corresponds to the b j -th cell among the X cells.
  • the p2 first domains indicate that there are m second domains (it can be understood that there are m Bi domains with a value of 1).
  • the m first domains respectively correspond to the cells whose B bj domain value is 1 in order.
  • FIG. 14 includes a reserved field R, and FIG. 14 may include m second domains, which are respectively denoted as second domain a1, second domain a2, ... for distinction.
  • the format of the first indication information is the second format in conjunction with FIG. 12 to FIG. 14. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the first indication information in the first format or the second format indicates the reference signal information used to restore the link failure cell
  • the method can include any of the following two methods.
  • the first indication information does not include the B field, but includes the new beam info field.
  • the new beam info field indicates the reference signal information used to restore the link failure cell.
  • the terminal device identifies a reference signal greater than the link failure recovery threshold
  • the new beam info field can indicate information such as the resource index of a certain reference signal; otherwise, the new beam info field can indicate that there is no reference signal greater than the link failure recovery threshold (or it is called that the recovery link is not recognized).
  • the reference signal of the failed cell special state value.
  • the first indication information includes the B field and the new beam info field, and the B field indicates whether there is a reference signal greater than the link failure recovery threshold (or whether the reference signal of the cell where the link recovery failed is identified). If the B field indicates that the reference signal of the cell where the link failed to be restored is recognized, there is a new beam info field, and the new beam info field indicates information such as the resource index of a reference signal used to restore the link failed cell.
  • first format ie, the first format
  • second format ie, the second format
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is smaller than the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format is smaller than the first indication information in the third format The number of bits occupied.
  • the number of link failure cells indicated by the first indication information in the first format is less than the number of link failure cells indicated by the first indication information in the second format, and the link indicated by the first indication information in the second format The number of failed cells is less than the number of link failure cells indicated by the first indication information in the third format.
  • the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format, and the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format is less than that of the first indication information in the third format. Indicates the load of the information included in the information.
  • the above-mentioned number of bits, number of information of the link failure cell, and load may all refer to the maximum value.
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format indicates the maximum number of bits that can be sent in the first indication information in the format.
  • the following describes how to determine the format of the first indication information based on the link failure cell.
  • condition of the link failure cell may include one or more of the following: the number of link failure cells, the information payload of the link failure cell, and whether the link is identified for restoring the link The situation of the reference signal of the failed cell, etc.
  • the format of the first indication information can be determined based on one or more of the following: the number of link-failed cells, the load of the information of the link-failed cells, or whether it is identified to recover the link-failed cell The condition of the reference signal, etc.
  • the format of the first indication information may be determined by the terminal device based on the condition of the link failure cell, or may be determined by the network device based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information may be determined directly based on the situation of the link failure cell, or may be determined indirectly based on the situation of the link failure cell.
  • Implementation manner 1 The terminal device determines the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell.
  • multiple formats have a corresponding relationship with the case of a link failure cell, and for distinction, it is recorded as the first corresponding relationship.
  • the terminal device may determine the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell and in combination with the first correspondence.
  • the first corresponding relationship may be preset, such as a network device configuration or protocol, or it may be stored in advance, which is not limited.
  • the form of the first correspondence may be: correspondence between multiple formats and the number of link failure cells.
  • the terminal device may adopt the first indication information of the corresponding format based on the corresponding relationship between the multiple formats and the number of link failure cells and based on the number of link failure cells.
  • the format of the first indication information when the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to the preset first threshold, the format of the first indication information may be the first format; when the number of link failure cells is greater than the preset first threshold, The format of the first indication information may be the second format.
  • the preset first threshold may be predefined, such as a protocol or a network device; or it may be configured by the network device for the terminal device; or it may be an empirical value, etc., which is not limited.
  • the form of the first correspondence relationship may be: a correspondence relationship between multiple formats and the load of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the terminal device may adopt the corresponding format of the first indication information based on the load of the information of the link failure cell according to the correspondence between the multiple formats and the load of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information when the information load of the link-failed cell is less than or equal to the preset second threshold, the format of the first indication information may be the first format; when the information load of the link-failed cell is greater than the preset second threshold At this time, the format of the first indication information may be the second format.
  • the preset second threshold may be predefined, such as a protocol or a network device; or it may be configured by the network device for the terminal device; or it may be an empirical value, etc., which is not limited.
  • the terminal device may determine the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell.
  • Implementation manner 2 The terminal device determines the format of the first indication information according to the resource carrying the second indication information.
  • the multiple formats have a corresponding relationship with the resource carrying the second indication information, and for distinction, it is recorded as the second corresponding relationship.
  • the terminal device may send second indication information to the network device, where the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails.
  • the terminal device sends second indication information to the network device for notifying the network device that a cell link failure occurs.
  • the second indication information may also be used to request resources that carry the first indication information.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application are both information sent by the terminal device to the network device to restore the link failure cell when a link failure occurs in a cell. They can be collectively referred to as the link Route failure recovery request information.
  • the manner in which the terminal device sends the beam failure recovery request information may include multiple manners, which are described in detail below.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information is recorded as the first resource
  • the resource carrying the second indication information is recorded as the second resource.
  • the first resource may be a PUCCH resource or a PUSCH resource
  • the second resource may be a PUCCH resource or a physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH) resource, which is not limited.
  • first resource and the second resource are only named for distinction, and those skilled in the art should understand their meaning.
  • the terminal device requests the network device to allocate the first resource
  • a network device allocates a first resource to a terminal device, it means that the network device allocates a certain block of resources for carrying the first indication information to the terminal device, which may indicate a certain block of resources.
  • the second resource can not only be used to carry second indication information, in addition, the second resource can also carry data, and so on.
  • the first resource may not only be used to carry first indication information, in addition, the first resource may also be used to carry data or other information. Alternatively, the first resource may also only be used to carry the first indication information. There is no restriction on this.
  • the terminal device may determine the format of the first indication information according to the resource carrying the second indication information in combination with the second correspondence.
  • the second corresponding relationship may be preset, such as a network device configuration or protocol, or may be stored in advance, which is not limited.
  • two second resources may be configured, which are respectively denoted as second resource #1 and second resource #2.
  • the second resource #1 and the second resource #2 can be distinguished by a cycle shift. Or, it can be distinguished by other means (for example, it can be divided by frequency; or it can be divided by time; or it can be divided by code), which is not limited.
  • the second resource #1 and the second resource #2 are respectively associated with or correspond to the first indication information in different formats.
  • the terminal device determines the first indication information according to whether the resource carrying the second indication information is the second resource #1 or the second resource #2. Indicates the format of the information.
  • the second resource #1 corresponds to the first indication information in the first format
  • the second resource #2 corresponds to the first indication information in the second format
  • the format of the first indication information corresponding to the second resource #1 is One format
  • the format of the first indication information corresponding to the second resource #2 is the second format.
  • the second resource #1 is associated with the first indication information of the smaller payload
  • the second resource #2 is associated with the first indication information of the larger payload.
  • the second resource #1 is associated with the first indication information requesting a smaller resource (that is, the smaller first resource)
  • the second resource #2 is associated with the first indication requesting a larger resource (that is, the larger first resource).
  • the second resource #1 corresponds to the first indication information that carries information of at most A cells
  • the second resource #2 corresponds to the first indication information that carries information of at most B cells.
  • a and B are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and A is less than B.
  • the specific values of A and B are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • a and B can be pre-defined by the network device or protocol, or can be configured by the network device, or can be calculated by the terminal device itself.
  • the format of the first instruction information sent by the terminal device is the first format, that is, the terminal device sends the first instruction information in the first format;
  • the format of the first instruction information sent by the terminal device is the second format, that is, the terminal device sends the first instruction information in the second format.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to use the second resource #1 to send the second indication information or to use the second resource #2 to send the second indication information based on the condition of the link failure cell. It can be understood that the terminal device can determine whether to use the second resource #1 to send the second indication information or to use the second resource #2 to send the second indication information based on the situation of the link-failed cell and in combination with the foregoing several possible associations or corresponding forms. Instructions.
  • the terminal device uses the second resource #1 to send the second indication information; when the number of link failure cells is greater than the preset first threshold At this time, the terminal device uses the second resource #2 to send the second indication information.
  • the network device is notified of the cell link failure through the second indication information, and the resource carrying the first indication information may also be requested through the second indication information.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of the format of the second resource and the first indication information.
  • the second resource #1 such as PUCCH, such as PUCCH 1
  • the second resource #2 such as PUCCH, such as PUCCH 1
  • the first indication information in the first format may be, for example, the MAC-CE in the first format shown in FIGS. 6 to 11
  • the first indication information in the second format may be, for example, the MAC-CE shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 MAC-CE in the second format.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of the format of the second resource and the first indication information.
  • the first indication information in the first format may include a serving cell ID field and a second field, such as SCell ID#a and beam (beam)#b, respectively.
  • the first indication information in the second format may include a serving cell ID field, and the serving cell ID field may include: one or more Ci fields (that is, the number of cells) and one or more corresponding second fields, such as respectively Marked as SCell ID#a1 and beam#b1, SCell ID#a2 and beam#b2, etc.
  • the terminal device determines that a link failure occurs in a cell, it sends the second indication information through the second resource #1 and sends the first indication information in the first format.
  • the terminal device determines that a link failure occurs in 5 cells, it sends the second indication information through the second resource #2 and sends the first indication information in the second format.
  • FIG. 15 only shows the case where the terminal device sends the second indication information through the second resource #2, and the format of the first indication information is the second format.
  • the terminal device uses the second resource #1 to send the second indication information; when the payload of the cell information of the link failure is greater than the preset second threshold At the second threshold, the terminal device uses the second resource #2 to send the second indication information.
  • the network device is notified of the cell link failure through the second indication information, and the resource carrying the first indication information may also be requested through the second indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the resource carrying the second indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell, and then determine the format of the first indication information according to the resource carrying the second indication information. It can also be understood that the terminal device can determine the format of the first indication information indirectly according to the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the terminal device determines the format of the first instruction information according to the second instruction information.
  • multiple formats have a corresponding relationship with the second indication information, in other words, multiple formats have a corresponding relationship with multiple status values of the second indication information, or in other words, the multiple formats have a corresponding relationship with the sequence of the second indication information.
  • Different cyclic shifts have a corresponding relationship, for distinction, it is recorded as the third corresponding relationship.
  • the terminal device can determine the format of the first indication information according to the second indication information in combination with the third correspondence.
  • the third correspondence relationship may be preset, such as a network device configuration or protocol stipulation, or it may be stored in advance, which is not limited.
  • the network device configures a third resource, and the terminal device sends second indication information on the third resource.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format
  • the format of the first indication information is The second format.
  • first value and the second value are different, and the first value and the second value are only names for distinguishing, and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the network device configures a third resource, and the terminal device sends second indication information on the third resource.
  • the cyclic shift of the sequence carrying the second indication information is the first cyclic shift
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format
  • the cyclic shift of the sequence carrying the second indication information is the second cyclic shift
  • bit the format of the first indication information is the second format.
  • the terminal device may determine the format of the first indication information according to the content of the second indication information, such as the cyclic shift or state value of the sequence of the second indication information.
  • the terminal device determines the format of the first indication information according to the size of the resource allocated by the network device.
  • the terminal device when the network device allocates relatively small resources to the terminal device to carry the first instruction information, the terminal device sends the first instruction information in the first format; when the network device allocates relatively large resources to the terminal device to carry the first instruction information At this time, the terminal device sends the first indication information in the second format.
  • the first format is a short format
  • the second format is a long format
  • the number of bits occupied by the first indication information of the first format is smaller than that of the second format.
  • the number of bits occupied by the indication information; and, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format, etc.
  • the terminal device can determine the format of the first indication information according to the size of the resource allocated by the network device.
  • the resource can carry the first indication information in the second format, determine the first indication
  • the format of the information is the second format, that is, the first instruction information in the second format is sent; otherwise, if the resource can carry the first instruction information in the first format, the format of the first instruction information is determined to be the first format, that is, the first instruction information is sent.
  • the first instruction information in a format.
  • the format of the first indication information is determined to be the second format, that is, the first indication information in the second format is sent; otherwise, the first indication information is determined
  • the format of is the first format, that is, the first instruction information of the first format is sent.
  • the resource when the resource can carry the first indication information in the second format, it is determined that the format of the first indication information is the second format, that is, the first indication information in the second format is sent; if the resource cannot carry the second format If the first indication information can carry the first indication information in the first format, it is determined that the format of the first indication information is the first format, that is, the first indication information in the first format is sent. For example, according to the above example, if a larger resource is allocated, the terminal device can use the larger resource to send the first indication information in the second format; if a smaller resource is allocated, the terminal device can use the smaller resource to send The first indication information in the first format.
  • the terminal device may or may not send the second indication information.
  • This implementation manner 4 can be used alone or in combination with implementation manner 1, or implementation manner 2, or implementation manner 3.
  • the terminal device may first send the second indication information to the network device, and the network device may allocate an appropriate size to the terminal device according to the resource carrying the second indication information or the content of the second indication information H. Then the terminal device can determine the format of the first indication information according to the size of the resource allocated by the network device.
  • the foregoing exemplarily introduces several implementation manners for determining the format of the first indication information, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this. Any manner that enables the terminal device to determine the format of the first indication information directly according to the condition of the link failure cell or indirectly according to the condition of the link failure cell falls within the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, each of the foregoing implementation manners can be used alone or in combination.
  • the format of the first indication information can be determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, so that a more appropriate format can be selected and the waste of resources can be reduced.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the payload of the cell information of the link failure to be transmitted.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the number of cells where the link fails.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the cell information of the link failure to be transmitted and the data payload.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information in a corresponding format according to the size of the resource used to carry the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may send the first instruction information in a corresponding format according to the resource used to carry the second instruction information.
  • the terminal device may send the first instruction information in a corresponding format according to the second instruction information.
  • the terminal device sends the first instruction information in the corresponding format according to the size of the resource allocated by the network device.
  • the terminal device may send the first instruction information in the corresponding format according to the format configured by the network device.
  • the above mainly introduces the first solution, including the format of the first indication information and several implementation methods for determining the format of the first indication information.
  • the second solution is introduced below.
  • Solution 2 The resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, and it can also be understood that the size of the resource carrying the first indication information is determined based on the link failure cell.
  • the network device may allocate the resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device according to the resource carrying the second indication information.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be indicated or activated based on the response information of the second indication information.
  • the response information of the second indication information may also be understood as the third indication information.
  • the network device may send response information to the second indication information.
  • the response information of the second indication information may indicate the first resource allocated for the terminal device, that is, the resource carrying the first indication information allocated by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be an aperiodic resource (or called a dynamic resource).
  • the network device can determine whether to allocate a resource carrying the first indication information according to whether there is a cell with a link failure in the current network (indicated by the second indication information). If the network device receives the second indication information, it can learn that there are cells in the current network that have link failures, and the network equipment can dynamically allocate resources that carry the first indication information, so that the terminal device can further report which cells have link failures Failure, and/or, report the new link information (reference signal information) of the cell where the link recovery failed.
  • the resource carrying the second indication information can be determined based on the condition of the link-failed cell, and the resource carrying the first indication information can be determined by the second indication information, which can be understood as the resource carrying the first indication information ( (Or called resource size) can also be determined indirectly based on the link failure cell.
  • the resource carrying the second indication information and the resource carrying the first indication information are both determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information and the resource carrying the second indication information have a corresponding relationship, which is recorded as the fourth corresponding relationship for distinction.
  • the network device can allocate the resource that carries the first indication information to the terminal device according to the resource that carries the second indication information in combination with the fourth correspondence.
  • the fourth corresponding relationship may be preset, such as a network device configuration or protocol, or it may be stored in advance, which is not limited.
  • the second resource #1 and the second resource #2 are still taken as examples for description.
  • the network device allocates a smaller resource for the terminal device to carry the first indication information; when the terminal device uses the second resource #2 to send the second indication information, the network The device allocates larger resources to the terminal device to carry the first indication information.
  • the link failure event is an emergency event
  • the link failure event is an emergency event
  • the number of cells where the link failure occurs is also uncertain.
  • the network device can allocate resources of an appropriate size to carry the first indication information, which can effectively save Resource overhead, improve resource utilization.
  • the response information of the second indication information may also be used to activate the resource carrying the first indication information.
  • the network device may allocate a resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device in advance, and activation is triggered by the response information of the second indication information.
  • the activated resource bearing the first indication information may be a semi-persistent resource (semi-persistent) or a static resource (periodic).
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be a semi-static resource or a static resource (for example, PUSCH, PUCCH, or PRACH) activated by the response information of the second indication information or the DCI after the second indication information.
  • a semi-static resource for example, PUSCH, PUCCH, or PRACH
  • the network device determines whether to activate the resource carrying the first indication information according to whether there is a cell with a link failure in the current network (indicated by the second indication information). If the network device receives the second indication information, it can learn that there are cells in the current network where the link failure occurs, and the network device activates the resource carrying the first indication information, so that the terminal device can further report which cells have link failures, and/ Or, report the new link information (reference signal information) of the cell where the link recovery failed.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be configured by higher layer signaling or system information, or may be a preset resource.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be configured by the network device for the terminal device, and sent to the terminal device through high-level signaling or system information.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may also be pre-appointed by the network device and the terminal device, or set in advance by the terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the resource that carries the first indication information may also be a resource that has an association relationship with the resource (the second resource) that carries the second indication information.
  • the resource the second resource
  • it is recorded as the fifth correspondence.
  • the second resource #1 and the second resource #2 are associated with a smaller resource carrying the first indication information; the second resource #2 is associated with a larger resource carrying the first indication information .
  • the terminal device can determine the resource that carries the first indication information in the case of knowing the resource that carries the second indication information and combining with the fifth correspondence.
  • the fifth corresponding relationship may be preset, such as a network device configuration or protocol, or it may be stored in advance, which is not limited.
  • the association relationship between the resource carrying the second indication information and the resource carrying the first indication information may be configured by system information such as master information block (MIB) or system information block (SIB), Alternatively, it can also be configured by RRC or MAC-CE signaling.
  • system information or signaling may be sent before sending the second indication information.
  • the configuration of the resource carrying the second indication information and the resource carrying the first indication information may also be configured through the foregoing system information or signaling.
  • the network device may configure multiple resources for the terminal device to transmit the second indication information, and configure multiple resources for the terminal device to transmit the first indication information, and the terminal device may use the multiple resources for transmitting the second indication information.
  • One or more resources for the indication information are selected as the resource for carrying the second indication information, and one or more resources for transmitting the first indication information may be selected as the resource for carrying the first indication information.
  • the multiple resources used to transmit the second indication information may be configured by the aforementioned system information such as MIB or SIB, or configured by signaling such as RRC or MAC-CE.
  • the multiple resources used to transmit the first indication information may also be configured by the aforementioned system information such as MIB or SIB, or configured by signaling such as RRC or MAC-CE.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may also be a resource associated with the resource carrying the second indication information.
  • the network device can configure multiple resources for carrying the second indication information and multiple resources for carrying the first indication information through system information such as MIB or SIB, or through RRC or MAC-CE signaling, And the association relationship between the plurality of resources used to carry the second indication information and the plurality of resources used to carry the first indication information, the terminal device may select one of the plurality of resources used to carry the second indication information as the bearer 2.
  • the resource for the indication information one may also be selected from a plurality of resources for carrying the first indication information as the resource for carrying the first indication information.
  • Each resource carrying the second indication information may be associated with one or more resources carrying the first indication information, and each resource carrying the second indication information may be associated with a resource carrying the first indication information in different sizes.
  • the terminal device sends the second indication information, then the terminal device sends the first indication information on the resource carrying the first indication information associated with the resource carrying the second indication information.
  • the first indication information can be sent directly on the resource carrying the first indication information instead of the resource allocated by the response information of the second indication information, which can effectively reduce the link recovery delay. , Improve the link recovery speed.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information can be determined based on the condition of the link-failed cell, so that resources can be allocated reasonably and resource waste can be reduced.
  • the first indication information sent by the terminal device may be generated based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information to be sent is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, that is, by designing a variable length information format to indicate the cell information of the link failure, the terminal device can adaptively adjust the information sent
  • the size or format of the first indication information effectively reduces the reporting of redundant information and reduces the reporting overhead.
  • determining the resource carrying the first indication information based on the condition of the link-failed cell can enable a reasonable allocation of the resource carrying the first indication information, reduce resource waste, and improve resource utilization.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information in the embodiment of the present application are both information sent by the terminal device to the network device to restore the link-failed cell when a link failure occurs in a cell. They can be collectively referred to as Request information for link failure recovery or beam failure recovery request information.
  • the beam failure recovery request information may only include the first indication information, or the beam failure request message may include the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the terminal device can send beam failure recovery request information in any of the following ways.
  • the beam failure recovery request information includes the first indication information. In this way, the beam failure recovery request information can be reported in only one step.
  • the first indication information indicates: the identity of the cell with the link failure, and/or the reference signal information used to restore the link of the cell with the link failure.
  • the first indication information may indicate: the cell identities of the N cells where the link fails, and/or the M reference signal information used to restore the links of the N cells.
  • M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first indication information may include: cell identification information of the N cells where the link fails, and/or M reference signals used to restore the links of the N cells information.
  • the method A may be applied to the case where the first indication information is carried on the PUSCH, for example, the case where the first indication information is MAC-CE.
  • the beam failure recovery request information includes first indication information and second indication information. In this way, the beam failure recovery request information can be reported in two steps.
  • the second indication information indicates that the cell link fails;
  • the first indication information indicates: the identity of the cell with the link failure, and/or the reference signal used to restore the link of the cell with the link failure information.
  • the second indication information may indicate the link failure of the cell;
  • the first indication information may indicate: the cell identities of the N cells that failed the link, and/or the link used to restore the N cells M pieces of reference signal information; where M and N are both integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the second indication information may indicate: link failure of at least one cell among the L cells, where L is an integer greater than 1, and the first indication information indicates: cells of N cells among the L cells Identifies, and/or, M reference signal information used to restore the links of the N cells; wherein, M and N are both integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first indication information may include: cell identities of N cells among the L cells, and/or M reference signal information used to restore links of the N cells.
  • the beam failure recovery request information includes first indication information and second indication information. In this way, the beam failure recovery request information can be reported in two steps.
  • the second indication information indicates the identity of the cell with the link failure
  • the first indication information indicates the reference signal information used to restore the link of the cell with the link failure
  • the second indication information indicates the cell identities of the N cells where the link failed; the first indication information indicates the M reference signal information used to restore the links of the N cells; where both M and N are greater than or An integer equal to 1.
  • the first indication information may include the M reference signal information used to restore the links of N cells.
  • the second indication information in mode B and mode C may also be referred to as scheduling request information, or the second indication information may adopt the same format as the scheduling request information.
  • the resource carrying the second indication information in the manner B and the manner C may be a PRACH resource, or may be a PUCCH resource.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information in the method A, the method B, and the method C may be a PUSCH resource, or may be a PUCCH resource.
  • the reference signal resource in the method A, the method B, and the method C may be a CSI-RS resource, or may also be an SSB resource.
  • indicating cell link failure can be understood as “indicating that at least one cell has a link failure”, and can also be understood as “indicating that there is a cell with a link failure”.
  • the information of the link-failed cell includes: the identifier of the link-failed cell, and or, reference signal information used to restore the link of the link-failed cell.
  • the magnitude relationship between N and M is not limited. There may be multiple correspondences between the N cells where the link has failed and the M reference signal information reported in the link failure recovery request message. For example: one cell corresponds to one reference signal information; or one cell corresponds to zero reference signal information; or one cell corresponds to multiple reference signal information; or, one reference signal information corresponds to multiple cells, which is not limited in this application .
  • FIG. 16 shows a specific example, and the method 1600 may include the following steps.
  • the terminal device determines that the link fails.
  • the terminal device determines that at least one cell link fails.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal resource for beam failure detection, and determines that the link between the terminal device and the network device fails.
  • This step 1610 is similar to step 510 in the method 500. I won't repeat them here.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signal resources, and identifies the reference signal used to restore the link between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the terminal device determines the reference signal with the channel quality greater than or equal to the link failure recovery threshold (new identified beam).
  • the determination process may be determined by measuring the channel quality information of the candidate reference signal set.
  • the method 1600 may further include step 1630.
  • the terminal device sends second instruction information.
  • the second indication information may indicate that the cell link fails.
  • the second indication information may also be referred to as second link failure recovery request information or scheduling request information, or the second indication information may be in the same format as the scheduling request information. It is only a naming and does not limit the scope of protection implemented by this application.
  • the resource carrying the second indication information may be a PRACH resource, or may be a PUCCH resource.
  • the second indication information may also indicate the status of the link failure cell.
  • the second indication information may also indicate one or more of the following: or the number of link failure cells, the number of bits of information of the link failure cells, and the load. It should be understood that the second indication information can only indicate the approximate range of the link failure cell, but cannot indicate the specific situation (that is, the second indication information can only indicate the coarse-grained link failure cell). For example, the second indication information may indicate whether the current link failure cell number is one or more.
  • the network device is configured with two second resources, such as the second resource #1 and the second resource #2, which can be used to carry the second indication information.
  • the terminal device may select the second resource #1 or the second resource #2 according to the condition of the cell where the link fails, and send the second indication information.
  • the network device configures a second resource to carry the second indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the second indication information (for example, determine the value of the second indication information or which sequence the second indication information is) according to the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be indicated or activated based on the response information of the second indication information.
  • the network device may send response information to the second indication information.
  • the response information of the second indication information (for example, recorded as the third indication information) may indicate the first resource allocated for the terminal device, that is, the resource carrying the first indication information allocated by the network device for the terminal device.
  • the response information of the second indication information may also be used to activate the resource carrying the first indication information.
  • the network device may allocate a resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device in advance, and activation is triggered by the response information of the second indication information.
  • the method 1600 may further include step 1640.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device.
  • the third indication information indicates a resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the third indication information may be understood as a response to the second indication information.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information may be a resource allocated by the network device to the terminal device based on the second indication information. Or, it can also be understood as a dynamic resource.
  • the network device may allocate a resource carrying the first indication information to the terminal device in advance, and activation is triggered by the response information of the second indication information.
  • the activated resource carrying the first indication information may be a semi-static resource or a static resource.
  • the terminal device sends first instruction information.
  • the first indication information may indicate the information of the cell where the link failure occurs.
  • the first indication information indicates the cell IDs of T2 cells where the link failed, and/or the T4 reference signal information of the link of the T2 cells is restored.
  • the terminal device may send the first indication information based on the determined format of the first indication information. For example, the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the payload of the cell information of the link failure to be transmitted. For another example, the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the number of cells where the link fails. For another example, the terminal device may send the first indication information in the corresponding format according to the cell information of the link failure to be transmitted and the data payload. For another example, the terminal device may send the first indication information in a corresponding format according to the size of the resource used to carry the first indication information. For another example, the terminal device may send the first instruction information in the corresponding format according to the format configured by the network device.
  • the resource for sending the first indication information by the terminal device may be determined based on sending the second indication information or based on the resource carrying the second indication information.
  • the resource carrying the first indication information reference may be made to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device may also send the first indication information on a certain PUSCH resource.
  • This step 1650 is similar to step 520 in the method 500. I won't repeat them here.
  • the method 1600 may further include step 1660.
  • the network device sends a link recovery response message to the terminal device.
  • the information involved in the method 1600 may refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • first indication information can be replaced with “MAC-CE”.
  • cell can be understood as “serving cell” and “carrier”.
  • the cell includes at least one of a downlink carrier, an uplink (uplink, UL) carrier, and an uplink supplementary (supplementary uplink, SUL) carrier.
  • a cell may include a downlink carrier and an uplink carrier; or a cell may include a downlink carrier and an uplink supplementary carrier; or a cell may include a downlink carrier, an uplink carrier, and an uplink supplementary carrier.
  • the carrier frequency of the uplink supplementary carrier is lower than that of the uplink carrier to improve uplink coverage.
  • the uplink carrier and the downlink carrier have different carrier frequencies; in the TDD system, the uplink carrier and the downlink carrier have the same carrier frequency.
  • the uplink resources are on the uplink carrier; the downlink resources are on the downlink carrier.
  • the uplink carrier may be a normal uplink carrier, or may be a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier.
  • SUL supplementary uplink
  • the time unit may be one or more radio frames, one or more subframes, one or more time slots, and one or more mini-slots defined in the LTE or 5G NR system ( mini slot), one or more orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, etc., can also be a time window formed by multiple frames or subframes, such as a system information (SI) window.
  • SI system information
  • both the first indication information and the second indication information are information sent by the terminal device to the network device to restore the link failure cell when a link failure occurs in a cell, which indicates that the first indication information and the second indication
  • the information is all information sent by the terminal device to the network device to restore the link failure cell in the case of a link failure in a cell. It does not mean that the terminal device sends to the network device when the link fails in the cell. The information used to restore the link failure cell.
  • the second resource and the third resource may be resources of the primary cell or secondary primary cell, and may also be resources configured by the network equipment to the terminal equipment dedicated to recovering the link failure cell (or The network equipment can be configured to the terminal equipment dedicated to the resources of the secondary cell that has failed to restore the link).
  • Which cell resource the "first resource” is may depend on the scheduling of the network equipment or the instructions of the network equipment.
  • the second resource and the third resource may be resources of the same cell or resources of different cells.
  • the "first indication information” and the “second indication information” may be indication information used to restore the link failure of the secondary cell and or the special cell.
  • the first indication information sent by the terminal device may be generated based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information to be sent is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, that is, by designing a variable length information format to indicate the cell information of the link failure, the terminal device can adaptively adjust the information sent
  • the size or format of the first indication information effectively reduces the reporting of redundant information and reduces the reporting overhead.
  • determining the resource carrying the first indication information based on the condition of the link-failed cell can allow a reasonable allocation of the resource carrying the first indication information, reduce resource waste, and improve resource utilization.
  • the methods and operations implemented by terminal devices can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in terminal devices
  • the methods and operations implemented by network devices can also be implemented by It can be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) of network devices.
  • each network element such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to realize the above functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitter device or the receiver device into functional modules according to the above method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each function module corresponding to each function.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1700 may include a communication unit 1710 and a processing unit 1720.
  • the communication unit 1710 can communicate with the outside, and the processing unit 1720 is used for data processing.
  • the communication unit 1710 may also be referred to as a communication interface or a transceiving unit.
  • the communication interface is used to input and/or output information, and the information includes at least one of instructions and data.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or related circuit on the chip or chip system.
  • the processor may also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
  • the communication device 1700 can implement steps or processes corresponding to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it can be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit or chip configured in the terminal device system. At this time, the communication device 1700 may be referred to as a terminal device.
  • the communication unit 1710 is configured to perform the transceiving-related operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to perform the processing related operations on the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to: determine that the link of at least one cell fails; the communication unit 1710 is configured to: send first indication information, where the first indication information indicates the information of the cell where the link fails, where the The first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell.
  • the communication unit 1710 is further configured to: according to the condition of the cell with the link failure, send second indication information on the corresponding second resource, the second indication information indicating the link failure of the cell.
  • the second indication information is used to request the first resource carrying the first indication information.
  • the communication unit 1710 is specifically configured to send second indication information on the third resource, where the second indication information is used to request the first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the communication unit 1710 is further configured to: receive third indication information, where the third indication information indicates a first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the first resource carries first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, including: the format of the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell; and/or the resource carrying the first indication information is Determined based on the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format or the second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy one or more of the following: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than The number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, Wherein, N1 and N2 are integers greater than 1 or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format
  • the first indication information in the first format includes one or more of the following information: a serving cell identity field, a first field, or a second field; wherein, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through the status value.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the format of the first indication information is the second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell identification field, first field, or second field; where, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in the form of a state value; and/or, in the case of the link failure cell, the precondition is not met.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link-failed cell by means of a bitmap.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the payload of the information of the link failure cell is less than or equal to a preset second threshold.
  • condition of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to: determine that the link of at least one cell fails; the processing unit 1720 is further configured to: determine the format of the first indication information according to the condition of the link failure cell, and the first indication information indicates Information about the cell where the link fails; the communication unit 1710 is used to send first indication information.
  • the first resource carries first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format or the second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy one or more of the following: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than The number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, Wherein, N1 and N2 are integers greater than 1 or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format
  • the first indication information in the first format includes one or more of the following information: a serving cell identity field, a first field, or a second field; wherein, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through the status value.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the format of the first indication information is the second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell identification field, first field, or second field; where, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in the form of a state value; and/or, in the case of the link failure cell, the precondition is not met.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link-failed cell by means of a bitmap.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the payload of the information of the link failure cell is less than or equal to a preset second threshold.
  • condition of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the communication device 1700 may implement the steps or processes performed by the terminal device in the method 500 and the method 1600 according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 1700 may include methods for executing the method 500 in FIG. 5 and the method 1600 in FIG.
  • the unit of the method performed by the terminal device is used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500 in FIG. 5 and the method 1600 in FIG. 16, respectively.
  • the communication unit 1710 can be used to execute step 520 in the method 500
  • the processing unit 1720 can be used to execute step 510 in the method 500.
  • the communication unit 1710 can be used to execute step 1630, step 1640, step 1650, and step 1660 in the method 1600, and the processing unit 1720 can be used to execute step 1610 in the method 1600 And step 1620.
  • the communication unit 1710 in the communication device 1700 may be implemented by the transceiver 1910 in the terminal device 1900 shown in FIG. 19, and the processing unit 1720 in the communication device 1700 may be implemented by the terminal device shown in FIG.
  • the processor 1920 in 1900 is implemented.
  • the transceiver may include a transmitter and/or a receiver, which respectively implement the functions of the sending unit and the receiving unit.
  • the communication unit 1710 in the communication device 1700 may also be an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1700 can implement the steps or processes performed by the network device corresponding to the above method embodiment.
  • it can be a network device, or a chip or circuit or circuit configured in the network device. Chip system.
  • the communication device 1700 may be referred to as a network device.
  • the communication unit 1710 is configured to perform the transceiving-related operations on the network device side in the above method embodiment
  • the processing unit 1720 is configured to perform the processing related operations on the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication unit 1710 is configured to: receive first indication information, the first indication information indicating information of a link failure cell, and the first indication information or the format of the first indication information is based on the condition of the link failure cell Determined; the processing unit 1720 is configured to: based on the first indication information, restore the link of the cell where the link fails.
  • the communication unit 1710 before receiving the first indication information, is configured to: receive second indication information, and the second resource or the second indication information carrying the second indication information is determined according to the condition of the link failure cell , The second indication information indicates that the cell link fails; the processing unit 1720 is configured to: determine the first resource that carries the first indication information according to the second resource that carries the second indication information or the second indication information.
  • the communication unit 1710 is further configured to: send third indication information, where the third indication information indicates the first resource that carries the first indication information.
  • the first resource carries first indication information in a corresponding format.
  • the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell, including: the format of the first indication information is determined based on the condition of the link failure cell; and/or the resource carrying the first indication information is Determined based on the link failure cell.
  • the format of the first indication information is the first format or the second format, wherein the first format and the second format satisfy one or more of the following: the number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the first format is less than The number of bits occupied by the first indication information in the second format; the first indication information in the first format indicates information about N1 link failure cells, and the first indication information in the second format indicates information about N2 link failure cells, Wherein, N1 and N2 are integers greater than 1 or equal to 1, and N1 ⁇ N2; or, the load of the information included in the first indication information in the first format is less than the load of the information included in the first indication information in the second format.
  • the format of the first indication information is a first format
  • the first indication information in the first format includes one or more of the following information: a serving cell identity field, a first field, or a second field; wherein, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through the status value.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the format of the first indication information is the second format
  • the first indication information of the second format includes one or more of the following information: serving cell identification field, first field, or second field; where, the serving cell
  • the identity field indicates the identity of the link failure cell through a bitmap.
  • the first field indicates whether the link failure cell indicated by the serving cell identity field has a corresponding second field
  • the second field indicates the link used to restore the link indicated by the serving cell identity field. Reference signal information of the failed cell link.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link failure cell in the form of a state value; and/or, in the case of the link failure cell, the precondition is not met.
  • the first indication information indicates the identity of the link-failed cell by means of a bitmap.
  • the preset condition includes: the number of link failure cells is less than or equal to a preset first threshold, or the payload of the information of the link failure cell is less than or equal to a preset second threshold.
  • condition of the link failure cell includes: the number of link failure cells and/or the payload of the information of the link failure cell.
  • the communication device 1700 may implement the steps or processes performed by the network device in the method 500 and the method 1600 according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 1700 may include methods for executing the method 500 in FIG. 5 and the method 1600 in FIG.
  • the unit of the method performed by the network device is used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500 in FIG. 5 and the method 1600 in FIG. 16, respectively.
  • the communication unit 1710 can be used to execute step 520 in the method 500
  • the processing unit 1720 can be used to execute step 530 in the method 500.
  • the communication unit 1710 may be used to execute step 1630, step 1640, step 1650, and step 1660 in the method 1600.
  • the communication unit in the communication device 1700 may be implemented by the transceiver 2010 in the network device 1900 shown in FIG. 20, and the processing unit 1720 in the communication device 1700 may be implemented by the network device shown in FIG.
  • the processor 2020 in 1900 is implemented.
  • the communication unit 1710 in the communication device 1700 may also be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may include a transmitter and/or a receiver, which respectively implement the functions of the sending unit and the receiving unit.
  • FIG. 18 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device 1800 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1800 includes a transceiver 1810, a processor 1820, and a memory 1830.
  • the memory 1830 stores a program.
  • the processor 1820 is used to execute the program stored in the memory 1830 and execute the program stored in the memory 1830. , So that the processor 1820 is used to execute the relevant processing steps in the above method embodiment, and executes the program stored in the memory 1830, so that the processor 1820 controls the transceiver 1810 to execute the transceiver related steps in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1800 is used to execute the actions performed by the terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the execution of the program stored in the memory 1830 enables the processor 1820 to execute the above method embodiment.
  • the processing steps on the terminal device side in the middle execute the program stored in the memory 1830, so that the processor 1820 controls the transceiver 1810 to perform the receiving and sending steps on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1800 is used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the execution of the program stored in the memory 1830 enables the processor 1820 to perform the above method implementation.
  • the processing steps on the network device side execute the programs stored in the memory 1830 so that the processor 1820 controls the transceiver 1810 to perform the receiving and sending steps on the network device side in the above method embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device 1900, and the communication device 1900 may be a terminal device or a chip.
  • the communication device 1900 may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 19 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 19 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 19. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor or integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1910 and a processing unit 1920.
  • the transceiver unit 1910 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and the like.
  • the processing unit 1920 may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1910 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1910 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1910 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • the processing unit 1920 is configured to execute step 510 in FIG. 5 and steps 1610 and 1620 in FIG. 16, and/or the processing unit 1920 is also configured to execute the terminal in the embodiment of the present application. Other processing steps on the device side.
  • the transceiving unit 1910 is also used to perform step 520 shown in FIG. 5, and steps 1630, 1640, 1650, and 1660 in FIG. 16, and/or the transceiving unit 1910 is also used to perform other transceiving steps on the terminal device side .
  • FIG. 19 is only an example and not a limitation, and the foregoing terminal device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 19.
  • the chip When the communication device 1900 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1900, which may be a network device or a chip.
  • the communication device 1900 can be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 20 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the base station structure.
  • the base station includes the 2010 part and the 2020 part.
  • the 2010 part is mainly used for receiving and sending radio frequency signals and the conversion between radio frequency signals and baseband signals;
  • the 2020 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling the base station.
  • the 2010 part can usually be called a transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, or transceiver.
  • the 2020 part is usually the control center of the base station, and may generally be referred to as a processing unit, which is used to control the base station to perform processing operations on the network device side in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit of the 2010 part can also be called a transceiver or a transceiver, etc. It includes an antenna and a radio frequency unit, and the radio frequency unit is mainly used for radio frequency processing.
  • the device used to implement the receiving function in the 2010 part can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device used to implement the sending function as the sending unit, that is, the 2010 part includes the receiving unit and the sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • the 2020 part may include one or more single boards, and each single board may include one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the processor is used to read and execute programs in the memory to implement baseband processing functions and control the base station. If there are multiple boards, the boards can be interconnected to enhance processing capabilities. As an optional implementation, multiple single boards may share one or more processors, or multiple single boards may share one or more memories, or multiple single boards may share one or more processing at the same time. Device.
  • the transceiver unit of part 2010 is used to perform step 510 in FIG. 5 and step 1610 and step 1620 in FIG. 16, and/or the transceiver unit of part 2010 is also used to perform the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit in the 2020 part is used to execute step 530 in FIG. 5, and/or the processing unit in the 2020 part is also used to execute the processing steps on the network device side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is only an example and not a limitation, and the foregoing network device including a transceiver unit and a processing unit may not rely on the structure shown in FIG. 20.
  • the chip When the communication device 1900 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is a processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the network equipment is not limited to the above forms, but may also be in other forms: for example, including AAU, CU node and/or DU node, or BBU and adaptive radio unit (ARU), or BBU and AAU; it can also be customer premises equipment (CPE), or other forms, which are not limited by this application.
  • AAU CU node and/or DU node
  • ARU adaptive radio unit
  • BBU and AAU BBU and AAU
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the above-mentioned CU and/or DU can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiment implemented by the network device, and the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send or receive from the terminal device action.
  • the AAU can be used to perform the network device described in the previous method embodiment to send or receive from the terminal device action.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface.
  • the processor may be used to execute the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the processing device may be a chip.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory synchronization DRAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer executes the steps shown in FIGS. 5 to 16 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium storing program code, which when the program code runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the steps shown in FIGS. 5 to 16 The method of any one of the embodiments is shown.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
  • the network equipment in the above device embodiments corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit transmits the receiving or sending in the method embodiments.
  • other steps can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the processing unit processor
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种通信方法和通信装置，以期终端设备上报链路失败的小区的信息时，可以选择合适格式的指示信息，或者选择合适大小的资源上报，减少上报资源的浪费。方法可以包括：终端设备确定至少一个小区的链路失败；终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，其中，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。

Description

一种通信方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2019年08月02日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910713406.7、申请名称为“一种通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，具体涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。
背景技术
在通信过程中，可能会出现波束被阻挡的情况，在波束被阻挡时，信号将无法继续传输。在出现波束被阻挡的情况下，防止通信被突然中段，引入了相应的机制对波束质量进行检测，并在发生阻挡的情况下快速恢复链路。
在现有技术中，终端设备会进行波束失败检测。终端设备确定波束失败后，向网络设备发送波束失败恢复请求(beam failure recovery request，BFRQ)信息(或者也可以称为链路失败恢复请求信息)，终端设备通过该BFRQ信息可以向网络设备指示链路失败小区的小区信息等信息。
终端设备发送BFRQ信息之前，网络设备无法获知有多少个小区发生链路失败，因此一般按照可能发生的链路失败的小区的最大个数，预留资源或设计信息格式，这样可能会造成资源的浪费。
发明内容
本申请提供一种通信方法和通信装置，以期终端设备上报链路失败的小区的信息时，可以减少上报资源的浪费。
第一方面，提供了一种通信方法。该通信方法可以由终端设备执行，或者，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该通信方法可以包括：确定至少一个小区的链路失败；发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，其中，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，可以是第一指示信息直接基于链路失败小区的情况确定，或者，也可以是第一指示信息间接地基于链路失败小区的情况确定。
第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，可以理解为，第一指示信息包括链路失败小区的信息。
可选地，链路失败小区的信息可以包括：链路失败小区的标识信息，和/或，参考信号信息，其中，参考信号信息用于恢复链路失败小区的链路。参考信号信息可以包括参考 信号资源索引和/或参考信号的信道质量(如以下一项或多项：RSRP、SINR、RSRQ、CQI、或SNR等)。例如，参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源和/或SSB资源。参考信号信息可以理解为参考信号资源信息，该参考信号资源信息包括参考信号资源的索引和/或该参考信号资源上的参考信号的信道质量(如以下一项或多项：RSRP、SINR、RSRQ、CQI、或SNR等)。
基于上述方案，终端设备发送的第一指示信息，即指示链路失败小区的小区信息的第一指示信息，可以是基于链路失败小区的情况生成的。例如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定将要发送的第一指示信息的格式，也就是说，通过设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，可以使得终端设备自适应调整其发送的第一指示信息的大小或格式，有效减小冗余信息的上报，降低上报开销。又如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定承载第一指示信息的资源，可以使得合理的分配承载第一指示信息的资源，降低资源的浪费，提高资源利用率。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在发送所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：根据链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败。
可选地，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，可以是第一指示信息间接地基于链路失败小区的情况确定，例如，第一指示信息可以基于第二指示信息的内容确定，或者，第一指示信息可以基于承载第二指示信息的第二资源确定。
可选地，多个第二资源与链路失败小区的情况具有对应关系，终端设备根据链路失败小区的情况，结合该对应关系，选择合适的第二资源发送第二指示信息。该对应关系可以是预先规定的，如网络设备预先配置的或者协议预先规定的，对此不作限定。
可选地，第二指示信息指示小区链路失败，可以表示：第二指示信息通知网络设备发生小区链路失败；或者，第二指示信息也可以指示网络设备小区链路失败的情况。
可选地，第二指示信息指示小区链路失败，可以表示：第二指示信息指示L个小区中的至少一个小区的链路失败，其中L为大于1的整数。
可选地，第二指示信息指示小区链路失败，可以表示：第二指示信息指示链路失败的N个小区的小区标识。
基于上述方案，终端设备根据链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，从而网络设备也可以根据该第二资源获知链路失败小区的情况。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
基于上述方案，终端设备根据链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，从而网络设备也可以根据该第二资源为终端设备分配合适大小的第一资源，可以有效节省资源开销，提高资源利用率。
应理解，此处终端设备向网络设备请求分配第一资源时，表示终端设备请求网络设备分配用于承载第一指示信息的资源，并不代表请求特定的某块资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述通信方法还包括：在第三资源上发送第二指示信息，其中，所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，第三资源可以为预先为终端设备划分的一块资源，用于终端设备通知网络设 备发生小区链路失败。
基于上述方案，终端设备也可以通过第二指示信息的内容，来向网络设备请求分配承载第一指示信息的第一资源。例如，第二指示信息的序列的循环移位为第一循环移位时，可以为终端设备分配较小的第一资源；第二指示信息的序列的循环移位为第二循环移位时，可以为终端设备分配较大的第一资源。又如，第二指示信息的状态值为第一取值时，可以为终端设备分配较小的第一资源；第二指示信息的状态值为第二取值时，可以为终端设备分配较大的第一资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在发送所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
应理解，网络设备为终端设备分配第一资源时，表示网络设备为终端设备分配了用于承载第一指示信息的某块资源，可以表示特定的某块资源。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
换句话说，在第一资源上发送对应格式的第一指示信息。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式与网络设备分配的承载第一指示信息的资源具有对应关系。例如，网络设备分配较小的资源来承载第一指示信息时，第一指示信息的格式为短格式；网络设备分配较大的资源来承载第一指示信息时，第一指示信息的格式为长格式。具体的下文实施例介绍。
基于上述方案，可以设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，并且在第一资源上发送对应格式的第一指示信息，从而可以降低资源的浪费。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
基于上述方案，可以设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，并且根据链路失败小区的情况，选择合适格式的第一指示信息，从而可以降低资源的浪费。此外，也可以基于链路失败小区的情况，使用合适大小的资源来承载第一指示信息，从而提高资源利用率、降低资源的浪费。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；或，所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
上述比特数、链路失败小区的信息的个数、负载，均可以指最大值。例如，第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数，表示该格式下的第一指示信息可以发送的最大比特数。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、 或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
应理解，服务小区标识域指示链路失败小区，可以是服务小区标识域指示一个或多个链路失败小区，此处并不限于一个小区。
可选地，服务小区ID域中指示的每个小区都可以有对应的第一域。例如，链路失败小区包括第一小区和第二小区，通过服务小区标识域指示第一小区和第二小区发生链路失败。对应第一小区的第一域指示第一小区是否存在第二域，对应第二小区的第一域指示第二小区是否存在第二域。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
可选地，预设的第一阈值或预设的第二阈值可以是预先定义的，如协议或网络设备预先定义；或者也可以是网络设备为终端设备配置好的；或者也可以是经验值等，对此不作限定。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些实现方式中，所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
基于上述方案，用于上报链路失败的小区的信息的第一指示信息可以基于以下一项或多项确定：链路失败小区的个数、链路失败小区的信息的负载(payload)、是否识别出用于恢复所述链路失败小区的参考信号的情况，等等。
第二方面，提供了一种通信方法。该通信方法可以由终端设备执行，或者，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该通信方法可以包括：确定至少一个小区的链路失败；根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息；发送所述第一指示信息。
可选地，根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式，可以是终端设备直接根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式；或者，也可以是终端设备间接地根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式。
基于上述技术方案，可以设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，并且根据链路失败小区的情况，选择合适格式的第一指示信息，从而可以降低资源的浪费。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
换句话说，在第一资源上发送对应格式的第一指示信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；或，所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些实现方式中，所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
第三方面，提供了一种通信方法。该通信方法可以由网络设备执行，或者，也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片或电路执行，本申请对此不作限定。
该通信方法可以包括：接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；基于所述第一指示信息，恢复链路失败小区的链路。
可选地，终端设备上报的链路失败小区的个数可以大于或等于网络设备恢复的链路失败小区的个数。或者说，终端设备上报多个小区发生链路失败，那么网络设备可以恢复该多个小区中的部分或全部小区的链路。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，在接收所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败；根据承载所 述第二指示信息的第二资源或所述第二指示信息，确定承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，承载所述第二指示信息的第二资源或所述第二指示信息是根据链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，确定承载第一指示信息的第一资源，可以包括：网络设备根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，为终端设备分配合适大小的承载第一指示信息的资源。
可选地，根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，确定承载第一指示信息的第一资源，可以包括：网络设备根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，激活承载第一指示信息的资源。承载第一指示信息的资源可以是由第二指示信息的响应信息激活的资源。
可选地，根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，确定承载第一指示信息的第一资源，可以包括：预先配置多个用于承载第二指示信息的资源和多个用于承载第一指示信息的资源，以及该多个用于承载第二指示信息的资源与多个用于承载第一指示信息资源的关联关系，网络设备可以根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源，确定承载第一指示信息的资源。该情况下，终端设备可以不用通过第二指示信息的响应信息分配的资源发送第一指示信息，而是直接在该承载第一指示信息的资源上发送。或者说，在该情况下，网络设备可以不用向终端设备发送指示承载第一指示信息的资源的响应信息。具体的下文实施例详细描述。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以基于链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，或者，生成第二指示信息，以便网络设备可以根据该第二资源为终端设备分配合适大小的承载第一指示信息的资源；或者，网络设备可以为终端设备激活承载第一指示信息的资源；或者，网络设备可以根据第二资源和第一资源的关联，结合承载第二指示信息的第二资源，确定对应的第一资源，即确定承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述通信方法还包括：发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
基于上述技术方案，网络设备可以动态地为终端设备分配合适大小的承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；或，所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式 的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些实现方式中，所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
第四方面，提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面提供的通信方法。具体地，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第二方面提供的通信方法的模块。
第五方面，提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置用于执行上述第三方面提供的通信方法。具体地，所述通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面提供的通信方法的模块。
第六方面，提供一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第一方面或第二方面以第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合，所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时，所述通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时，所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片或芯片系统。
可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第七方面，提供一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第三方面以及第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合，所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息。所述信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时，所述通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时，所述通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片或芯片系统。
可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第八方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被通信装置执行时，使得所述通信装置实现第一方面或第二方面，以及第一方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。
第九方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被通信装置执行时，使得所述通信装置实现第三方面，以及第三方面的任一可能的实现方式中的通信方法。
第十方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述指令被计算机执行时使得通信装置实现第一方面或第二方面提供的通信方法。
第十一方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述指令被计算机执行时使得通信装置实现第三方面提供的通信方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。
基于本申请实施例，终端设备发送的第一指示信息，即指示链路失败小区的信息的第一指示信息，可以是基于链路失败小区的情况生成的。例如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定将要发送的第一指示信息的格式，也就是说，通过设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，可以使得终端设备自适应调整其发送的第一指示信息的大小或格式，有效减小冗余信息的上报，降低上报开销。又如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定承载第一指示信息的资源，可以使得合理的分配承载第一指示信息的资源，降低资源的浪费，提高资源利用率。
附图说明
图1和图2是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意图；
图3中示出了波束训练过程的示意图；
图4示出了一种链路失败恢复流程的一示意图；
图5是根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一示意性交互图；
图6至图14示出了适用于本申请实施例的第一指示信息的格式的示意图；
图15示出了适用于本申请实施例的第二资源与第一指示信息的格式的示意图；
图16是根据本申请实施例提供的通信方法的又一示意性交互图；
图17是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一示意性框图；
图18是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一示意性框图；
图19是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的示意性框图；
图20是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(univeRMal mobile telecommunication system，UMTS)、第五代(5th generation，5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio，NR)等。其中，5G移动通信系统可以包括非独立组网(non-standalone，NSA)和/或独立组网(standalone，SA)。
本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统，如第六代移动通信系统。通信系统还可以是PLMN网络、设备到设备(device-to-device，D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)网络、物联网(internet of things，IoT)网络或者其他网络。其中，IoT网络例如可以包括车联网。其中，车联网系统中的通信方式统称为V2X(X代表任何事物)，例如，该V2X通信包括：车辆与车辆(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)通信，车辆与路边基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)通信、车辆与行人之间的通信(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)或车辆与网络(vehicle to network，V2N)通信等。
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为：用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备，例如，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前，一些终端的举例为：手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的终端设备等，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设 备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
此外，在本申请实施例中，终端设备还可以是IoT系统中的终端设备，IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分，其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接，从而实现人机互连，物物互连的智能化网络。在本申请实施例中，IoT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术，做到海量连接，深度覆盖，终端省电。
此外，在本申请实施例中，终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器，主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据，并发送电磁波，向网络设备传输上行数据。
另外，本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备，该网络设备可以是全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications，GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB，NB)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB，eNB或eNodeB)，还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等，本申请实施例并不限定。
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是无线网络中的设备，例如将终端接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)节点。目前，一些RAN节点的举例为：基站、下一代基站gNB、发送接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、家庭基站、基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)，或WiFi系统中的接入点(access point，AP)等。
在一种网络结构中，网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的RAN设备。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层，以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit，MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统，例如，Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且，本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定，只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序，以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可，例如，本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备， 或者，是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。
另外，本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如，计算机可读介质可以包括，但不限于:磁存储器件(例如，硬盘、软盘或磁带等)，光盘(例如，压缩盘(compact disc，CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc，DVD)等)，智能卡和闪存器件(例如，可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外，本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于，无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先结合图1和图2详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。
图1示出了适用于本申请实施例的通信系统100的示意图。通信系统100可以处于单载波场景或载波聚合场景(carrier aggregation，CA)中。载波聚合可以是指将多个连续或非连续的单元载波聚合成更大的带宽。
如图所示，该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备，例如图1所示的网络设备110；该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备110与终端设备120可通过无线链路通信。
当终端设备120检测到网络设备110和终端设备120之间的链路发生故障后，终端设备120可以向网络设备110发送链路失败恢复请求(beam failure recovery request，BFRQ)。可选地，网络设备110接收到该BFRQ后，可以向终端设备120发送链路失败恢复响应(beam failure recovery response，BFRR)或重新配置链路。
可选地，网络设备110下可以包括一个或多个小区。例如，包括第一小区和第二小区，若终端设备120和网络设备110在第二小区的链路发生故障，该第一小区可以辅助该第二小区进行链路恢复，例如，终端设备120可以在属于该第一小区的上行资源上向网络设备110发送该BFRQ信息，终端设备120可以在属于该第二小区的下行资源上接收网络设备110发送的该BFRR信息。
当通信系统100的传输方向为上行传输时，终端设备120为发送端，网络设备110为接收端。当通信系统100的传输方向为下行传输时，网络设备110为发送端，终端设备120为接收端。
图2示出了适用于本申请实施例的通信系统200的另一示意图。通信系统200可以处于双链接(dual connectivity，DC)、多链接、或多点协作传输(coordinated multipoint transmission/reception，CoMP)的场景中。
如图所示，该通信系统200可以包括多个网络设备，例如图2中所示的网络设备210和网络设备220；该通信系统200还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图2中所示的终端设备230。该终端设备230可以通过多连接技术与网络设备210、网络设备220建立无线链路。其中，网络设备210例如可以为主基站，网络设备220例如可以为辅基站。此情况下，网络设备210为终端设备230初始接入时的网络设备，负责与终端设备230之间的无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)通信，网络设备220可以是RRC重配置时添加的，用于提供额外的无线资源。配置了载波聚合的终端设备230与网络设备210和网络 设备220相连，网络设备210和终端设备230之间的链路可以为称之为第一链路，网络设备220和终端设备230之间的链路可以称之为第二链路。
此外，如图2所示，该两个网络设备之中，可以有一个网络设备，如网络设备210，负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息，并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互，那么，该网络设备210可以称之为主节点(master node，MN)，例如，主节点可以是主基站(master eNB，MeNB)或者主基站(master gNB，MgNB)，不限定于此；则另一个网络设备，如网络设备220，可以称之为辅节点(secondary node，SN)，例如，辅节点可以是辅基站(secondary eNB，SeNB)或者辅基站(secondary gNB，SgNB)，不限定于此。其中，主节点中的多个服务小区可以组成主小区组(master cell group，MCG)，包括一个主小区(primary cell，PCell)和可选的一个或多个辅小区(secondary cell，SCell)。辅节点中的多个辅小区可以组成辅小区组(secondary cell group，SCG)，包括一个主辅小区(primary secondary cell，PSCell)和可选的一个或多个SCell。服务小区是指网络配置给终端设备进行上下行传输的小区。
为便于了解，简述上文提及的术语。
主小区：也可以称为主服务小区(primary serving cell，PCell)。PCell是载波聚合下的终端设备驻留的小区。一般情况下，只有PCell才有物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)。
主辅小区：也可以称为辅助主小区。PSCell是主基站(master eNodeB，MeNB)通过RRC连接信令配置给双链接下的终端设备的在辅基站(secondary eNodeB，SeNB)上的一个特殊辅小区。
SCell：指通过RRC连接信令配置给载波聚合下的终端设备的小区，工作在辅载波(SCC)上，可以为载波聚合下的终端设备提供更多的无线资源。SCell可以有下行，也可以上下行同时存在。
特殊小区(Special Cell，SpCell)：对于双链接场景，SpCell指主小区组(master cell group，MCG)的PCell或者辅小区组(secondary cell group，SCG)的PSCell。对于其他场景，如载波聚合场景，SpCell指PCell。
MCG：指主基站中为终端设备提供服务的小区所在的组为主小区组。在双链接模式下，MCG包括MeNB关联的一组服务小区，包括PCell和一个或多个SCell。
SCG：指辅基站中为终端设备提供服务的小区所在的组为辅小区组。在双链接模式下，SCG包括PSCell和可选的一个或多个SCell。
MeNB：双链接下的终端设备驻留小区所属的基站。
SeNB：MeNB通过RRC连接信令配置给双链接下的终端设备的另一个或多个基站。
类似的，终端设备也可以同时与更多数量的网络设备存在通信连接并可收发数据，该多个网络设备之中，可以有一个网络设备负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息，并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互，那么，该网络设备可以称之为MN，则其余的网络设备可以称之为SN。
当然，也可以是网络设备220为主基站或主节点，网络设备210为辅基站或辅节点，本申请对此不做限定。另外，图中仅为便于理解，示出了两个网络设备与终端设备之间无线连接的情形，但这不应对本申请所适用的场景构成任何限定。终端设备还可以与更多的 网络设备建立无线链路，或者，终端设备还可以与更少的网络设备建立无线链路。
网络设备210和网络设备220可以都向终端设备230配置用于传输BFRQ的上行资源时，当该第一链路或者第二链路发生故障，则终端设备230可以在用于传输BFRQ的上行资源上向网络设备210或者网络设备220发送BFRQ，网络设备210或者网络设备220收到该BFRQ后，向终端设备230发送BFRR。
特别地，若该网络设备220没有配置用于传输BFRQ的上行资源，那么当该第二链路发生故障时，该终端设备230可以通过该网络设备210恢复该第二链路。
各通信设备，如图1中的网络设备110或终端设备120，或者图2中的网络设备210、网络设备220或终端设备230，可以配置多个天线。该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外，各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链，本领域普通技术人员可以理解，它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此，网络设备与终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。
上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明，适用本申请的通信系统不限于此，例如，通信系统中包括的网络设备和终端设备的数量还可以是其它的数量，或者采用单基站、多载波聚合的场景、双链接的场景或设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信场景。
应理解，本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于载波聚合场景下的一个小区辅助另一个小区或者多个小区恢复链路。或者，本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于双链接场景下，一个小区组内的一个小区辅助另一个小区或者多个小区恢复链路。或者，本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于单载波或载波聚合或双链接场景下，一个小区在该小区的资源上恢复本小区的链路失败。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的技术方案可以适用于主小区(PCell)是高频或者低频，辅小区(SCell)是高频或者低频的情况。例如，当PCell是低频，SCell是高频。在一种可能的实现方式中，对于没有配置上行资源的SCell，可以使用PCell的上行资源辅助SCell恢复链路。通常低频和高频是相对而言的，也可以以某一特定频率为分界，例如6GHz。
还应理解，本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于多点协作传输(coordinated multipoint transmission/reception，CoMP)场景下，一个TRP辅助另一个TRP恢复链路。其中CoMP可以为以下一种或多种场景：非相干联合发送(non coherent joint transmission，NCJT)、相干联合发送(coherent joint transmission，CJT)、或联合发送(joint transmission，JT)。
为便于理解本申请实施例，对本申请中涉及的几个术语做简单说明。
1、控制资源集合(control resource set，CORESET)
控制资源集用于传输下行控制信息的资源集合，也可以称为控制资源区域，或物理下行控制信道资源集合。
网络设备可为终端设备配置一个或多个控制资源集合，用于发送物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)。网络设备可以在终端设备对应的任一控制资源集合上，向终端设备发送控制信道。此外，网络设备还需要通知终端设备所述控制资源集合相关联的其他配置，例如搜索空间集合等。每个控制资源集合的配置信息存在差异，例如频域宽度差异、时域长度差异等。
可选地，本申请中的控制资源集合可以为以下任意一项：5G移动通信系统定义的CORESET、控制区域(control region)、或增强物理下行控制信道(enhanced-physical downlink control channel，ePDCCH)集合(set)。
PDCCH所占用的时频位置可以称之为下行控制区域。一种可能的情况，PDCCH始终位于一个子帧的前m个符号，其中，m可能的取值为1、2、3、或4。E-PDCCH和R-PDCCH的位置未处于前m个符号。
下行控制区域可以由RRC信令通过控制资源集合(control resource set，CORESET)和搜索空间集合(search space set)灵活配置。控制资源集合可以配置PDCCH或控制信道单元(control channel element，CCE)的频域位置，时域的持续符号数等信息。搜索空间集合可配置PDCCH的检测周期以及偏移量，在一个时隙内的起始符号等信息。
例如，搜索空间集合可配置PDCCH周期为1个时隙，时域起始符号为符号0，则终端设备可以在每个时隙的起始位置检测PDCCH。
2、空间相关参数信息
空间相关参数信息可以包括准共址(quasi-collocation，QCL)信息，还可以包括空间关系(spatial relation)信息。一般来说，QCL信息用于指示下行信号的空间相关参数(还可以称为空间相关特性)，spatial relation信息用于指示上行信号的空间相关参数(还可以称为空间相关特性)。
上行信号包括但不限于：PUCCH、物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)与解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)。
下行信号包括但不限于：PDCCH、物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)、追踪参考信号(tracking reference signal，TRS)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)、小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal，CS-RS)、UE专用参考信号(user equipment specific reference signal，US-RS)、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)以及同步信号广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block，SS/PBCH block)。其中，SS/PBCH block可以简称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block，SSB)。SSB包括以下一项或多项：主同步信号(primary synchronization signal，PSS)、辅同步信号(secondary synchronization signal，SSS)和PBCH。主要用于小区搜索、小区同步、承载广播信息的信号。
spatial relation信息用于辅助描述终端设备发射侧波束赋形信息以及发射流程。
spatial relation信息用于指示两个参考信号之间的空间发送参数关系。目标参考信一般为下行信号，例如可以是DMRS或SRS等。被引用的参考信号或者源参考信号一般可以是：CSI-RS、SRS、或SSB等。
准共址，也可以称为准共站或同位置。QCL信息也可以称为QCL假设信息。QCL信息用于辅助描述终端设备接收波束赋形信息以及接收流程。
QCL信息可以用于指示两个参考信号之间的QCL关系。目标参考信号一般为下行信号，例如可以是DMRS或CSI-RS等。被引用的参考信号或者源参考信号一般可以是：CSI-RS、SSB、或TRS等。TRS也是CSI-RS的一种。以PDCCH的QCL信息为例，PDCCH 的QCL信息配置方法可以如下：
配置PDCCH的K个候选QCL信息，如通过RRC配置PDCCH的K个候选QCL信息，K个候选QCL信息例如可以包括K个TCI-state，其中，K为大于1或等于1的整数；
指示PDCCH的QCL信息(如)，如通过媒体接入控制(Media Access Control，MAC)控制元素(control element，CE)(MAC CE)指示PDCCH的QCL信息(K为大于1的整数时)。
可以规定在初始无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)和媒体访问控制(media access control，MAC)-控制元素(control element，CE)阶段，终端设备假设PDCCH、PDSCH的DMRS与初始接入时确定的SSB是QCL的。
具有QCL关系的天线端口对应的信号中可以具有相同的或相近的空间特性参数(或称为参数)，或者，一个天线端口的空间特性参数(或称为参数)，可以用于确定与该天线端口具有QCL关系的另一个天线端口的空间特性参数(或称为参数)，或者，两个天线端口具有相同的或相似的空间特性参数(或称为参数)，或者，两个天线端口间的空间特性参数(或称为参数)差小于某阈值。
应理解，满足QCL关系的两个参考信号或信道的空间特性参数是相同的(或相近的，或相似的)，从而基于该源参考信号资源索引可推断出目标参考信号的空间特性参数。
还应理解，满足空间关系信息的两个参考信号或信道的空间特性参数是相同的(或相近的，或相似的)，从而基于该源参考信号资源索引可推断出目标参考信号的空间特性参数。
其中，空间特性参数可以包括以下参数中的一种或多种：
入射角(angle of arrival，AoA)、主(dominant)入射角AoA、平均入射角、入射角的功率角度谱(power angular spectrum，PAS)、出射角(angle of departure，AoD)、主出射角、平均出射角、出射角的功率角度谱、终端设备发送波束成型、终端设备接收波束成型、空间信道相关性、网络设备发送波束成型、网络设备接收波束成型、平均信道增益、平均信道时延(average delay)、时延扩展(delay spread)、多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)、多普勒频移(doppler shift)、或空间接收参数(spatial Rx parameters)等。
其中，上述角度可以为：不同维度的分解值，或，不同维度分解值的组合。天线端口可以为具有不同天线端口编号的天线端口。天线端口还可以为：具有相同天线端口号或不同天线端口号，在不同时间内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口。天线端口还可以为：具有相同天线端口号或不同天线端口号，在不同频率内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口。天线端口还可以为：具有相同天线端口号或不同天线端口号，在不同码域资源内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口。
这些空间特性参数描述了源参考信号与目标参考信号的天线端口间的空间信道特性，有助于终端设备根据该QCL信息完成接收侧波束赋形或接收处理过程。例如终端设备可以根据QCL信息指示的源参考信号的接收波束信息，接收目标参考信号。这些空间特性参数还有助于终端设备根据该空间相关信息完成发射侧波束赋形或者发射处理过程。例如终端设备可以根据空间相关信息指示的源参考信号的发射波束信息，发射目标参考信号。
其中，为了节省网络设备对终端设备的QCL信息指示开销，作为一种可选的实施方式，网络设备可以指示PDCCH或PDSCH的解调参考信号与终端设备之前上报的多个参 考信号资源中的一个或多个是满足QCL关系的。例如，该参考信号可以是CSI-RS。每一个上报的CSI-RS资源索引对应了一个之前基于该CSI-RS资源测量时建立的一个收发波束对。应理解，满足QCL关系的两个参考信号或信道的接收波束信息是相同的，该终端设备可以根据该参考信号资源索引推断出接收PDCCH或PDSCH的接收波束信息。
在现有协议中，QCL关系可以基于不同的参数分为以下四种类型：
类型A(type A)：多普勒频移(Doppler shift)、多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)、平均时延(average delay)、时延扩展(delay spread)；
类型B(type B)：多普勒频移、多普勒扩展；
类型C(type C)：多普勒频移、平均时延；以及
类型D(type D)：空间接收参数(Spatial Rx parameter)。
网络设备可以同时给终端设备配置一个或多种类型的QCL，如QCL type A+D，C+D等。
当QCL关系指类型D的QCL关系时，可以认为是空域QCL。当天线端口满足空域QCL关系时，可以是下行信号的端口和下行信号的端口之间，或上行信号的端口和上行信号的端口之间的QCL关系(如上文中称为spatial relation)。例如，对于下行信号和上行信号间的QCL关系，或上行信号与下行信号的端口间的QCL关系，可以是两个信号具有相同的AOA或AOD，用于表示具有相同的接收波束或发射波束。又如，对于下行信号和上行信号间的QCL关系，或上行信号与下行信号的端口间的QCL关系，可以是两个信号的AOA和AOD具有对应关系，或两个信号的AOD和AOA具有对应关系，即可以利用波束互易性，根据下行接收波束确定上行发射波束，或根据上行发射波束确定下行接收波束。
从发送端来看，如果说两个天线端口是空域QCL的，则可以是指这两个天线端口的对应的波束方向在空间上是一致的。从接收端来看，如果说两个天线端口是空域QCL的，则可以是指接收端能够在同一波束方向上接收到这两个天线端口发送的信号。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以具有对应的波束，对应的波束可以包括以下一项或多项：相同的接收波束、相同的发射波束、与接收波束对应的发射波束(如可以对应于有互易的场景)、与发射波束对应的接收波束(如可以对应于有互易的场景)。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为使用相同的空间滤波器(spatial filter)接收或发送信号。空间滤波器可以为以下一项或多项：预编码、天线端口的权值、天线端口的相位偏转、或天线端口的幅度增益。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为具有对应的波束对连接(beam pair link，BPL)，对应的BPL包括以下一项或多项：相同的下行BPL、相同的上行BPL、与下行BPL对应的上行BPL、或与上行BPL对应的下行BPL。
因此，空间接收参数(即，类型D的QCL)可以理解为用于指示接收波束的方向信息的参数。
在本申请的举例中，某些参数的对应关系也可以应用于QCL描述下的场景。
应理解，本申请中适用于QCL假设的场景，也可以是两个参考信号，或者也可以是传输对象间的关联关系。
3、传输配置指示(transmission configuration indicator，TCI)状态(TCI-state)
TCI-state可用于指示信号或信道的QCL信息。其中，信道例如可以是：PDCCH、CORESET、或PDSCH等。信号例如可以是：CSI-RS、DMRS、或TRS等。TCI信息可以指TCI中包括的参考信号与该信道满足QCL关系，主要用于指示接收信道时，其空间特性参数等信息与TCI中包括的参考信号的空间特性参数等信息相同、相似、或相近。TCI信息还可以指TCI中包括的参考信号与该信号满足QCL关系，主要用于指示接收信号时，其空间特性参数等信息与TCI中包括的参考信号的空间特性参数等信息相同、相似、或相近。
一个TCI-state可以配置一个或多个被引用的参考信号，及所关联的QCL类型(QCL type)，换句话说，一个TCI-state的配置信息可以包括一个或两个参考信号资源的标识，以及所关联的QCL类型。QCL类型又可以分为：类型A、类型B、类型C、类型D，四个类别，分别是{Doppler shift，Doppler spread，average delay，delay spread，spatial Rx parameter}的不同组合或选择。TCI-state包括QCL信息，或者TCI-state用于指示QCL信息。
TCI-state是由网络设备配置给各个终端设备的，下列是TCI-state的一格式。
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000001
此外，TCI-state可以是全局配置的。在为不同的小区、不同的带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)配置的TCI-state中，若TCI-state的索引相同，则所对应的TCI-state的配置也相同。
4、单元载波(component carrier，CC)
单元载波又可以称为分量载波，组成载波，或成员载波等。多载波聚合中的每个载波都可以称为“CC”。终端设备可以在多个CC上接收数据。每个载波由一个或多个物理资 源块(physical resource block，PRB)组成，每个载波上可以有各自对应的PDCCH，调度各自CC的PDSCH；或者，有些载波没有PDCCH，此时所述载波可以进行跨载波调度(cross-carrier scheduling)。
跨载波调度：网络设备在一个CC上发送PDCCH来调度另一个CC上的数据传输，即，在另一个CC上传输PDSCH，或者，在另一个CC上传输PUSCH。更具体地，网络设备可以在一个CC的带宽部分(BWP)上发送PDCCH来调度另一个CC上的BWP的PDSCH或PUSCH的传输。即，控制信道在一个CC上传输，而对应的数据信道在另一个CC上传输。
5、波束
波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束，或者窄波束，或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术手段。波束赋形技术可以具体为：数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术、混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同的波束可以发送相同的信息或者不同的信息。
可选地，可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束对应一个或多个天线端口，用于传输数据信道、控制信道和探测信号等。一个波束对应的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。
用于发送信号的波束可以称为发送波束(transmission beam，Tx beam)，可以称为空域发送滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter)或空间发射参数(spatial transmission parameter)；用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam，Rx beam)，可以称为空域接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial RX parameter)。
发送波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布，接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。
波束可以分为：网络设备的发送波束和接收波束、终端设备的发送波束和接收波束。网络设备的发送波束用于描述网络设备发送侧波束赋形信息，网络设备的接收波束用于描述网络设备接收侧波束赋形信息。终端设备的发送波束用于描述终端设备发送侧波束赋形信息，终端设备的接收波束用于描述终端设备接收侧波束赋形信息。也即波束可以用于描述波束赋形信息。
波束一般和资源对应，波束可以对应：时间资源、空间资源、频域资源。
可选地，波束还可以与参考信号资源(例如，波束赋形的参考信号资源)，或者波束赋形信息对应。
可选地，波束还可以与网络设备的参考信号资源关联的信息对应。其中参考信号例如可以为：CSI-RS、SSB，DMRS、相位跟踪信号(phase tracking reference signal，PTRS)、或TRS等。参考信号资源关联的信息可以是参考信号资源标识，或者QCL信息(如type D的QCL)等。其中，参考信号资源标识对应了之前基于该参考信号资源测量时建立的一个收发波束对，通过该参考信号资源索引，终端设备可推断波束信息。
可选地，波束还可以与空域滤波器(spatial filter或spatial domain filter)、空域传输滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter)对应。
其中，接收波束可以等价于空间传输滤波器，空域传输滤波器，空域接收滤波器，空间接收滤波器；发送波束可以等价于空域滤波器，空域传输滤波器，空域发送滤波器，空 间发送滤波器。空间相关参数的信息可以等价于空间滤波器(spatial dimain transmission/receive filter)。可选地，空间滤波器一般包括空间发送滤波器和/或空间接收滤波器。该空间滤波器还可以称之为空域发送滤波器，空域接收滤波器，空间传输滤波器，空域传输滤波器等。其中，终端设备侧的接收波束和网络设备侧的发送波束可以为下行空间滤波器，终端设备侧的发送波束和网络设备侧的接收波束可以为上行空间滤波器。
6、天线端口(antenna port)
天线端口也可以简称端口。被接收端设备所识别的发射天线，或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以配置一个天线端口，每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合，每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号端口对应。
7、带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)
由于NR中同一小区中不同终端设备的发射或者接收能力可能是不同的，系统可以为每个终端设备配置相应的带宽，这一部分配置给终端设备的带宽称为BWP，终端设备在自己的BWP上传输。BWP可以是载波上一组连续的频域资源，如物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)，不同的BWP可以占用的频域资源可以部分重叠(overlap)，也可以互不重叠。不同的BWP占用的频域资源的带宽可以相同，也可以不同，本申请对此不作限定。BWP在频域上的最小粒度可以为1个PRB。
在单载波场景下，一个终端设备在同一时刻可以只有一个激活的BWP，终端设备只在激活的BWP(active BWP)上接收数据/参考信号，或者发送数据/参考信号。
在本申请中，适用于BWP场景的情况中，特定的BWP也可以是一个特定的频率上的带宽集合，或者是多个资源块(resource block，RB)组成的集合等等，对此不做限定。
8、检测链路失败及恢复链路失败所配置的参考信号
通信系统通常使用两种类型的参考信号：一类参考信号用于估计信道，从而可以对含有控制信息或者数据的接收信号进行相干解调，另一类参考信号用于信道状态或信道质量的测量，从而实现对终端设备的调度。终端设备基于对CSI-RS的信道质量测量得到信道状态信息(CSI)。CSI包括以下一项或多项：秩指示(rank indicator，RI)、预编码指示(precoding matrix indicator，PMI)、或信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)。这些信息可由终端设备通过物理上行控制信道或物理上行共享信道发送给网络设备。
为了检测波束失败，网络设备可以给终端设备指示用于波束失败检测的参考信号(beam failure detection RS)资源(也可以称为链路失败检测的参考信号资源)。
例如，网络设备可以通过以下一种或多种信令指示：RRC、媒体接入控制控制元素(media access control control element，MAC-CE)、或DCI信令，指示配置的链路失败检测参考信号资源集合。又如，波束失败检测的参考信号还可以通过隐式方式指示，如将指示PDCCH的TCI中关联的参考信号作为波束失败检测的参考信号，该参考信号是与PDCCH的DMRS满足QCL关系的参考信号，且为周期发送的参考信号。
可选地，当网络设备显示配置了用于波束失败检测的参考信号资源集合时，终端设备可以根据该波束失败检测参考信号资源集合检测波束失败；当网络设备没有显示配置用于波束失败检测的参考信号资源集合时，终端设备可以按照上述隐式方式指示的参考信号检测波束失败。
为了恢复波束失败，网络设备还可以给终端设备指示用于恢复终端设备与网络设备链 路的候选参考信号资源集合(candidate beam RS list或candidate beam RS identification resource或beam failure candidate beam resource或candidate beam identification RS或candidate beam list)(也可以称为候选参考信号资源集合或链路失败恢复参考信号资源集合)。
波束失败后，终端设备可以从候选参考信号资源集合中选出信道质量信息(如参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)，信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)，块差错率(block error ratio，BLER)，信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to Interference plus noise ratio，SINR)，信噪比(signal noise ratio，SNR)等)高于预定门限的参考信号资源，用于恢复通信链路。也可以理解为，candidate beam identification RS用于终端设备在判断出网络设备的发射波束发生波束失败后，用于发起链路重配的参考信号集合。
应理解，在具体实现中，用于波束失败检测的参考信号资源集合以及用于恢复终端设备与网络设备链路的参考信号资源集合这两个集合的名称还可以有其他叫法，本申请对此不作具体限定。
上述仅是示例性说明，本申请实施例对用于波束失败检测的参考信号资源、用于恢复终端设备与网络设备链路的候选参考信号资源集合、以及如何检测、如何恢复，均不作限定。
在本申请实施例中，波束失败，还可以称为通信失败、波束故障、链路失败、链路故障、通信失败、通信故障、通信链路失败、通信链路故障等。在本申请实施例中，这些概念是相同的含义。
在本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复也可以称为恢复网络设备与终端设备通信，通信失败恢复、波束故障恢复、波束恢复、链路失败恢复、链路故障恢复、链路恢复、通信失败恢复、通信故障恢复、通信链路失败恢复、通信链路故障恢复、通信恢复、链路重配等。
本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复请求信息(beam failure recovery request，BFRQ)又可以称为通信失败恢复请求信息、波束故障恢复请求信息、波束恢复请求信息、链路失败恢复请求信息、链路故障恢复请求信息、链路恢复请求信息、通信故障恢复请求信息、通信恢复请求信息、通信链路失败恢复请求信息、通信链路故障恢复请求信息、通信链路恢复请求信息、链路重配请求信息、重配请求信息等。可选地，波束失败恢复请求可以是指在用于承载通信失败恢复请求的资源上发送信号。
应理解，本申请实施例中的“信息”可以替换为“消息”。在本申请实施例中，这些概念是相同的含义。
本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复响应信息(beam failure recovery response，BFRR)又可以称为通信失败恢复响应信息、波束故障恢复响应信息、波束失败响应信息、波束故障响应信息、波束恢复响应、链路失败恢复响应信息、链路故障恢复响应信息、链路失败响应信息、链路故障响应信息、链路恢复响应信息、通信故障恢复响应信息、通信失败响应信息、通信故障响应信息、通信恢复响应信息、通信链路失败恢复响应信息、通信链路故障恢复响应信息、通信链路故障响应信息、通信链路失败响应信息、通信链路响应信息、链路重配响应信息、重配响应信息等。应理解，本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复响应信息可以简称为响应信息。
本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复响应信息可以是指在用于发送通信失败恢复响应的控制资源集合和/或搜索空间集合上接收循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)由小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI)加扰的下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，该波束失败恢复响应信息还可以由其他信息加扰的DCI(如BFR-RNTI加扰的DCI)，该波束失败恢复响应信息还可以是由上述DCI调度的数据，该波束失败恢复响应信息还可以是由上述DCI调度的数据的ACK。该波束失败恢复响应信息还可以是以下信息中的一种：C-RNTI加扰的DCI、调制编码方式(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)小区特定无线网络临时标识MCS-C-RNTI加扰的DCI、专用搜索空间内的下行控制信息DCI、专用无线网络临时标识RNTI加扰的DCI、随机接入无线网络临时标识RA-RNTI加扰的DCI、包含预设状态值的DCI、包含传输配置指示TCI信息的DCI、发生链路失败的小区的准共址QCL指示信息或预设格式的DCI，所述预设格式的DCI指示新传数据。本申请实施例对此并不作限定。
应理解，本申请实施例中的波束失败、波束失败恢复、波束失败恢复请求信息和波束失败恢复响应信息的名称还可以有其他叫法，本申请对此不作具体限定。
应理解，本申请实施例中，链路恢复失败可以理解为终端设备不再发送链路失败恢复请求信息，也可以理解为停止链路失败恢复时钟计时，也可以理解为停止链路失败恢复计数器计数等。
9、波束训练过程
波束训练过程可以包括如下过程。
最优的N个波束对(beam pair link，BPL)的选择，其中，N为大于1或等于1的整数。一个BPL可以包括一个网络设备的发射波束和一个终端设备的接收波束，或者，一个BPL可以包括一个终端设备的发射波束和一个网络设备的接收波束。终端设备基于网络设备的波束扫描实现对网络设备的发射波束和/或终端设备的接收波束的选择，以及，网络设备基于终端设备的波束扫描实现对终端设备的发射波束和/或网络设备的接收波束的选择。如图3中的(1)所示的下行联合TRP和终端设备的波束细化(DL TRP and UE beam refinement)，或如图3中的(2)所示的上行联合TRP和终端设备的波束细化(UL TRP and UE beam refinement)。
发射波束的更新。该发射波束可以为网络设备的发射波束，也可以为终端设备的发射波束。一种可能的情况，当该发射波束为网络设备的发射波束时，如图3中的(5)所示的下行TRP的波束细化(DL TRP beam refinement)，网络设备通过不同的发射波束向终端设备发送参考信号，终端设备通过同一个接收波束来接收网络设备通过不同的发射波束发送的参考信号，并基于接收信号确定网络设备的最优发射波束。然后终端设备将网络设备的最优发射波束反馈给网络设备，以便于网络设备对发射波束进行更新。又一种可能的情况，当该发射波束为终端设备的发射波束时，如图3中的(4)所示的上行终端设备的波束细化(UL UE beam refinement)，终端设备通过不同的发射波束向网络设备发送参考信号，网络设备通过同一个接收波束来接收终端设备通过不同的发射波束发送的参考信号，并基于接收信号确定终端设备的最优发射波束。然后将终端设备的最优发射波束反馈给终端设备，以便于终端设备对发射波束进行更新。其中，上述通过不同的发射波束发送参考信号的过程可以称为波束扫描，基于接收信号确定最优发射波束的过程可以称为波束 匹配。
接收波束的更新。该接收波束可以为网络设备的接收波束，也可以为终端设备的接收波束。一种可能的情况，当该接收波束为网络设备的接收波束时，如图3中的(6)所示的上行TRP的波束细化(UL TRP beam refinement)，终端设备通过同一个发射波束向网络设备发送参考信号，网络设备采用不同的接收波束接收终端设备发送的参考信号。然后网络设备基于接收信号确定网络设备的最优接收波束，以对网络设备的接收波束进行更新。又一种可能的情况，当该接收波束为终端设备的接收波束时，如图3中的(3)所示的下行终端设备的波束细化(DL UE beam refinement)，网络设备通过同一个发射波束向终端设备发送参考信号，终端设备采用不同的接收波束接收网络设备发送的参考信号。然后终端设备基于接收信号确定终端设备的最优接收波束，以对终端设备的接收波束进行更新。
在下行信号的传输中，网络设备的发射波束和终端设备的接收波束均可能发生动态变化，终端设备基于接收信号确定的最优接收波束可能包括多个。为了使终端设备确定自身的接收波束，终端设备可以将多个接收波束的信息反馈给网络设备。网络设备可以通过向终端设备发送波束指示信息来向终端设备指示终端设备的接收波束。当终端设备采用模拟域的波束赋形时，终端设备可以基于网络设备发送的波束指示信息来精确的确定终端设备的接收波束，从而可以节省终端设备的波束扫描时间，达到省电的效果。
通过波束训练过程，网络设备获得与终端设备通信较优的N个BPL，BPL包括<Bx,B’x>以及<By,B’y>。其中，Bx代表网络设备的发送波束，B’x代表终端设备的接收波束，By代表终端设备的发送波束，B’y代表网络设备的接收波束。在网络设备和终端设备的后续通信过程中，网络设备和终端设备会采用这N个BPL进行数据传输。
在通信过程中存在遮挡，高频信道下的绕射能力差，导致当前服务的波束被阻挡，信号无法继续传输。为了防止在出现波束被阻挡的情况下，通信被突然中段，需要引入相应的机制对波束质量进行检测，并在发生阻挡的情况下快速恢复链路。
图4示出了一种链路失败恢复流程的示意图。如图4所示，可以包括如下步骤。
410，波束失败检测。
终端设备测量波束失败检测的参考信号集合(beam failure detection RS set)，确定该终端设备与网络设备之间的链路失败。
终端设备确定与网络设备之间链路失败的方式有很多，本申请实施例对此不作限定。例如，当终端设备判断连续N次波束失败检测的参考信号(beam failure detection RS)或者beam failure detection RS set中全部或部分参考信号的信道质量信息小于或等于链路失败检测门限时，该终端设备可以确定该终端设备与网络设备之间的链路发生失败。其中，N为大于1或等于1的整数。
420，识别候选参考信号。
终端设备可以识别候选参考信号集合(candidate beam identification RS)中的参考信号，终端设备可以根据该参考信号恢复链路。终端设备识别参考信号的过程，可以理解为终端设备在候选参考信号集合中确定信道质量大于或者等于链路失败恢复门限的参考信号(new identified beam)。
430，终端设备向网络设备发送链路失败恢复请求信息。
440，网络设备向终端设备发送链路失败恢复响应信息。
在步骤430中，换句话说，终端设备可以向网络设备发送波束失败恢复请求(beam failure recovery request，BFRQ)信息，终端设备通过该BFRQ信息可以向网络设备指示链路失败小区的小区信息等信息。
终端设备发送链路失败恢复请求信息之前，网络设备无法获知有多少个小区发生链路失败，因此一般总是按照可能发生的链路失败的小区的最大个数预留资源。
此外，一般地，终端设备通过MAC-CE上报BFRQ信息。指示链路失败恢复请求信息的MAC-CE可以指示多个链路失败小区的小区信息。网络设备在给终端设备分配链路失败恢复请求信息的资源时，由于网络设备不知道有多少个链路失败的小区，因此一般总是按照可能发生的链路失败的小区的最大个数设计MAC-CE格式。
那么，当终端设备确定在配置的小区中仅有一个或少数小区发生链路失败，需要发送链路失败恢复请求信息时，会造成资源浪费。
有鉴于此，本申请提出一种方法，可以合理地分配资源，降低资源的浪费。
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的各个实施例。
图5是本申请实施例提供的方法500的示意性交互图。方法500可以包括如下步骤。
510，确定至少一个小区的链路失败。
终端设备确定至少一个小区的链路失败，换句话说，终端设备确定1个或多个小区的链路失败，或者说，终端设备检测一个或多个小区发生链路失败。关于链路失败的原因，本申请实施例不作限定。例如，波束被阻时或者信号质量变差时，链路可能失败。
终端设备确定与小区之间链路失败的方式有很多。
例如，当终端设备判断用于检测该小区的波束失败检测的参考信号的信道质量，或者，当终端设备判断用于检测该小区的波束失败检测的参考信号集合中全部或部分参考信号的信道质量，连续N次小于预设门限时，该终端设备可以确定该终端设备与小区之间的链路发生失败。其中，N为大于1或等于1的整数。预设门限，或者说链路失败检测门限，或者说链路失败门限，可以是预先配置或预先定义的门限值，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
又如，假设用于波束失败检测的参考信号集合中的参考信号，与PDCCH的解调参考信号满足QCL关系，或者与PDCCH使用相同的TCI状态。当该参考信号集合中的部分或者所有参考信号的信道质量信息(如RSRP，CQI，BLER，SINR，SNR等)低于波束失败检测门限，则判定为波束失败。该波束失败检测门限也可以称为预定门限，也可以称为链路失败检测门限，还可以称为链路失败门限。应理解，只要是用于链路失败的检测的门限均可以为该波束失败检测门限，本申请实施例不对该波束失败检测门限的名称做限定。可选地，该波束失败检测门限可以是网络设备配置的，还可以是与无线链路失败失步门限(radio link failure OOS(out of sync))相同的门限。可选地，当网络设备配置了波束失败检测门限时，使用该波束失败检测门限检测波束失败；当网络设备没有配置波束失败检测门限时，可以将无线链路失步门限作为波束失败检测门限检测波束失败。
应理解，本申请实施例对终端设备确定与小区之间链路失败的方式不作限定，任何可以使得终端设备确定与小区之间链路失败的方式都适用于本申请实施例。
520，终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，其中，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，网络设备可以根据该第一指示信息恢复链路失败的小区。
应理解，终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，可以是终端设备向发生链路失败的网络设备发送第一指示信息，并通过该网络设备恢复该终端设备与该网络设备之间的链路失败。或者，终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，也可以是该终端设备向另一个网络设备发送第一指示信息，通过该另一个网络设备恢复该终端设备与网络设备之间的链路失败。
链路失败小区的信息可以包括：链路失败小区的标识信息，和/或，参考信号信息，其中，参考信号信息用于恢复链路失败小区的链路。可以理解，参考信号信息和链路失败小区的标识信息可以单独发给网络设备，也可以通过第一指示信息统一发给网络设备。例如，链路失败小区的信息可以包括链路失败小区的标识信息；或者，链路失败小区的信息可以包括参考信号信息；或者，链路失败小区的信息可以包括链路失败小区的标识信息和参考信号信息。换句话说，第一指示信息可以指示链路失败小区的标识信息；或者，第一指示信息可以指示参考信号信息；或者，第一指示信息可以指示链路失败小区的标识信息和参考信号信息。
其中，参考信号信息可以包括参考信号资源索引和/或参考信号的信道质量(如以下一项或多项：RSRP、SINR、RSRQ、CQI、或SNR等)。例如，参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源和/或SSB资源。
参考信号信息可以理解为参考信号资源信息，该参考信号资源信息包括参考信号资源的索引和/或该参考信号资源上的参考信号的信道质量(如以下一项或多项：RSRP、SINR、RSRQ、CQI、或SNR等)。
第一指示信息，例如可以为MAC-CE，即可以通过MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息。为简洁，下文统一用第一指示信息表示。
一种可能的实现方式，第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，可以包括：第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的标识(identity，ID)(或者称为索引(index，ID))，下文统一用小区的ID示例性说明。例如，假设第一小区和第二小区发生链路失败，那么终端设备可以向网络设备指示第一小区和第二小区的信息，如第一小区的ID和第二小区的ID。终端设备向网络设备发送第一指示信息，从而网络设备可以获知哪些小区发生链路失败。
可选地，终端设备上报的链路失败的小区的个数可以小于或等于检测的链路失败的小区的个数。例如，假设在步骤510中，终端设备确定T1个小区的链路失败，在步骤520中，终端设备发送的第一指示信息中，可以携带T2个小区的信息，如指示T2个小区的标识(或者称为索引(index，ID))。其中，T1、T2均为大于1或等于1的整数，且T1大于或等于T2。下文为便于描述，以终端设备上报的链路失败的小区的个数等于检测的链路失败的小区的个数为例示例性说明。
又一种可能的实现方式，第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，可以包括：第一指示信息指示参考信号信息，也就是说，第一指示信息还可以上报恢复链路失败小区的新链路的信息。参考信号信息用于恢复链路失败小区的链路。例如，第一指示信息可以指示恢复T2个小区的链路的T3个参考信号信息。其中，T3为大于1或等于1的整数。
可选地，链路失败小区的情况，可以包括以下一项或多项：链路失败小区的个数、链 路失败小区的信息的负载(payload)、是否识别出用于恢复所述链路失败小区的参考信号的情况，等等。
第一指示信息基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，可以包括：
方案一、第一指示信息的格式是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，
方案二、承载第一指示信息的资源是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
下文将详细描述上述方案一和方案二。
530，网络设备基于第一指示信息，恢复链路失败小区的链路。
网络设备接收到第一指示信息后，恢复第一指示信息中指示的链路失败小区的部分或全部小区的链路。
例如，假设在步骤520中，终端设备通过第一指示信息上报T2个小区发生链路失败，那么网络设备收到第一指示信息后，恢复T4个小区的链路。其中，该T4个小区属于T2个小区，T4为大于1或等于1的整数，且T4小于或等于T2。
下面详细介绍上述方案一和方案二。
方案一、第一指示信息的格式是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
首先，介绍一下第一指示信息的格式。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式可以为第一格式，也可以为第二格式。例如，第一格式可以称为短格式，第二格式可以称为长格式；或者，第一格式可以称为单条目(single entry)，第二格式可以称为多条目(multi entry)。
应理解，第一格式、短格式、或单条目，仅是一种命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定；第二格式、长格式、或多条目，仅是一种命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。下文统一用第一格式和第二格式表述。
可选地，第一格式和第二格式满足以下一项或多项条件：
第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数；或，
第一格式的第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，第二格式的第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2，换句话说，第一格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数小于第二格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数；或，
第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
应理解，上述两种格式仅是示例性说明，本申请实施例并未限定于此，例如还可以设计更多的格式。
还应理解，上述比特数、链路失败小区的信息的个数、负载，均可以指最大值。例如，第一格式的第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，表示第一格式的第一指示信息最多指示N1个链路失败小区的信息。
可以理解为，考虑到链路失败小区的情况，例如考虑到链路失败小区的个数，可以预先定义多种格式的第一指示信息，例如两种格式(第一个格式和第二格式)的第一指示信息，从而可以根据链路失败小区的情况，选择合适格式的第一指示信息，降低资源的浪费。
下面分别介绍第一指示信息的格式为第一格式和第二格式的情况。
1)第一指示信息的格式为第一格式。
可选地，该第一格式的第一指示信息可以包括以下一项或多项：服务小区标识域(服务小区ID域)、第一域、第二域、或预留比特位。
其中，服务小区ID域可以通过状态值方式指示链路失败的小区ID。
应理解，服务小区ID域只是一种命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定，本申请实施例不排除在未来协议中用其他命名来表示相同的含义。下文用服务小区ID域域描述。
第一格式的第一指示信息可以通过状态值的方式上报链路失败的小区ID。例如，该第一指示信息包括服务小区ID域，该服务小区ID域通过状态值方式指示链路失败的小区ID。又如，该第一指示信息包括SCellIndex域，该SCellIndex域通过状态值方式指示链路失败的服务小区的ID。服务小区ID域可以称为ServCellIndex域或者SCellIndex域。
例如，网络设备配置给某个终端设备的服务小区共有X个(即最多有X个)，或者网络设备配置给某个终端设备的需要链路失败检测的服务小区共有X个，或者网络设备配置给某个终端设备的可以做链路失败恢复的服务小区共有X个，那么该服务小区标识域通过
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000002
个比特指示，这些小区中是哪个小区发生了链路失败。其中，X为大于1或等于1的整数，
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000003
表示对log2(X)向上取整，应理解，这里的取整方式还可以是向下取整或四舍五入等。
示例性地，X＝31，那么可以通过5比特(bit)指示链路失败的小区ID，如00001，指示小区ID为1的小区发生链路失败；00010，指示小区ID为2的小区发生链路失败，……以此类推。
其中，第一域，也可以称为B域，该B域指示对应的服务小区ID域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域。下面以B域为例进行说明。
应理解，第一域、B域均只是一种命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定，本申请实施例不排除在未来协议中用其他命名来表示相同的含义。下文用B域描述。
其中，第二域，也可以称为新波束指示(new beam info)域，该new beam info域指示用于恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号的信息。该new beam info可以为参考信号资源索引。
应理解，第二域、new beam info域均只是一种命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定，本申请实施例不排除在未来协议中用其他命名来表示相同的含义。下文用new beam info域描述。
参考信号的信息包括参考信号资源索引和/或参考信号的信道质量。其中，信道质量可以包括以下一项或多项：参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)、信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)、参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality，RSRQ)、信道质量指示(channel quality indication，CQI)、或信噪比(signal noise ratio，SNR)等。
应理解，该参考信号资源可以为候选参考信号资源集合中的一个参考信号资源或者多个参考信号资源。
B域指示服务小区ID域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的new beam info域，可以理解为，B域指示是否存在new beam info域，或者说，该B域指示是否存在用于恢复链 路的参考信号，或者说，该B字域指示是否存在用于恢复链路的参考信号资源。
服务小区ID域中指示的每个小区都可以有对应的B域。可选地，一个链路失败的小区对应B域中的1bit，或者一个链路失败的小区对应一个1bit的B字域。例如，链路失败小区包括第一小区和第二小区，通过服务小区标识域指示第一小区和第二小区发生链路失败。对应第一小区的B域指示第一小区是否存在第二域，对应第二小区的B域指示第二小区是否存在第二域。
如，第一格式的第一指示信息可以最多包含两个字节(第一字节和第二字节)，其中第一字节包括B域(第一字节还可以包括服务小区标识域)。当B域为0时，第二字节内容不存在，或者第二字节内容与第一字节内容相同，或者，第二字节不存在new beam info域；当B域为1时，第二字节内容存在，或者，第二字节存在new beam info域。或者，也可以是，当B域为1时，第二字节内容不存在，或者第二字节内容与第一字节内容相同，或者，第二字节不存在new beam info域；当B域为0时，第二字节内容存在，或者，第二字节存在new beam info域。
如图6或图7所示，一个八位字节(Oct，octet)表示8比特(bits)构成的一个字节(byte)，图6或图7中包括两个Oct，为区分记为Oct 1、Oct 2。如图6或图7所示，该MAC-CE中包括两个字节，第一字节Oct 1和第二字节Oct 2。在图6或图7所示的示例中，第二字节内容存在，或者，第二字节存在new beam info域。
应理解，第一字节和第二字节仅是为区分做的命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
应理解，以一个小区为例，服务小区ID域、B域、以及new beam info域之间的关系可以是：服务小区ID域指示一个链路失败小区的ID，B域指示该小区是否存在new beam info域，new beam info域指示用于恢复该小区链路的参考信号的信息。
还应理解，对于服务小区ID域指示的每个小区，都可以有对应该小区的B域来指示该小区是否存在new beam info域，new beam info域指示用于恢复该小区链路的参考信号的信息。
其中，预留比特位(reserved bit)(R比特位)，一般设置为0。该R比特位一般不指示任何信息。
上文示例性地介绍了第一指示信息为第一格式时可以包括的内容，应理解，本申请实施例并未限定于此。此外，该第一指示信息为第一格式时可以有多种形式。下文以第一指示信息为MAC-CE，结合几种情况示例性说明。
下文各个情况中，服务小区标识即服务小区ID。
情况1，X＝31，用于恢复一个小区链路的参考信号资源集合(candidate beam list)中的参考信号资源的最大个数为64，那么该第一格式的MAC-CE可以占两个字节。
在该情况1下，MAC-CE至少可以为示例1和示例2所示的任意一种形式。
示例1：表1和图6示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格式，该格式中不存在B域。
如图6所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域、new beam info域、以及预留比特位。
服务小区ID域，占用5比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
new beam info域，占用6比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
“R”表示预留比特，一般设置为“0”。
表1
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000004
示例2：表2和图7示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格式，该格式中存在B域。
如图7所示，一个Oct表示8比特构成的一个字节，图7中包括两个Oct，为区分记为Oct 1、Oct 2。如图7所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域、new beam info域、B域、以及预留比特位。
服务小区ID域，占用5比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
B域，占用1比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号是否存在。进一步地，如果B域为“1”，则表示存在new beam info域。如果B域为“0”，则表示不存在new beam info域。当然，取值“1”、“0”的含义仅为示例，本申请不限于此。
new beam info域，占用6比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
“R”表示预留比特(Reserved bit)，一般设置为“0”。
表2
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000005
情况2，X小于或等于8，用于恢复一个小区链路的参考信号资源集合(candidate beam list)中的参考信号资源的最大个数为16，那么该第一格式的MAC-CE可以占一个字节。
在该情况2下，MAC-CE至少可以为示例3和示例4所示的任意一种形式。
示例3：表3和图8示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格式，该格式中不存在B域。
如图8所示，一个Oct表示8比特构成的一个字节，图8中包括一个Oct，记为Oct 1。如图8所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域、new beam info域、以及预留比特位。
服务小区ID域，占用3比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
new beam info域，占用4比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
“R”表示预留比特(Reserved bit)，一般设置为“0”。
表3
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000006
示例4：表4和图9示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格 式，该格式中存在B域。
如图9所示，一个Oct表示8比特构成的一个字节，图9中包括一个Oct，记为Oct 1。如图9所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域、new beam info域、以及B域。
服务小区ID域，占用3比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
B域，占用1比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号是否存在。进一步地，如果B域为“1”，则表示存在new beam info域。如果B域为“0”，则表示不存在new beam info域。当然，取值“1”、“0”的含义仅为示例，本申请不限于此。
new beam info域，占用4比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
表4
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000007
情况3，X小于或等于8，用于恢复一个小区链路的参考信号资源集合(candidate beam list)中的参考信号资源的最大个数为32，那么该第一格式的MAC-CE可以占一个字节。
在该情况3下，MAC-CE至少可以为示例5所示的形式。
示例5：表5示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格式，该格式中不存在B域。或者，也可以如图10所示。
如图10所示，一个Oct表示8比特构成的一个字节，图10中包括一个Oct，记为Oct1。如图10所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域和new beam info域。
服务小区标识域，占用3比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
new beam info域，占用5比特：指示恢复服务小区标识域对应的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
表5
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000008
情况4，X小于或等于16，用于恢复一个小区链路的参考信号资源集合(candidate beam list)中的参考信号资源的最大个数为16，那么该第一格式的MAC-CE可以占一个字节。
在该情况4下，MAC-CE至少可以为示例6所示的形式。
示例6：表6和图11示出了利用MAC-CE指示BFRQ信息的一种可能的MAC CE格式，该格式中不存在B域。
如图11所示，一个Oct表示8比特构成的一个字节，图11中包括一个Oct，记为Oct1。如图11所示，该MAC-CE可以包括服务小区ID域和new beam info域。
服务小区ID域，占用4比特：指示该MAC-CE所指示的链路失败的小区的ID。
new beam info域，占用4比特：指示恢复服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区的参考信号资源索引。
表6
服务小区标识(serving cell ID) new beam info
上文示例性地介绍了几种情况，应理解，本申请实施例并未限定于此，任何属于上述几种情况的变形都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。
上文介绍了第一指示信息的格式为第一格式的情况，下文介绍第一指示信息的格式为第二格式的情况。
2)第一指示信息的格式为第二格式。
可选地，该第二格式的第一指示信息可以包括以下一项或多项：服务小区ID域、B域、new beam info域、或预留比特位。
其中，服务小区ID域可以通过位图指示链路失败小区的ID。位图的每个比特位可以对应一个Ci域。假设Ci域取值为1，表示该Ci域对应的小区发生链路失败，那么，如果服务小区ID域指示T2个链路失败的小区的ID，即可以理解为服务小区ID域中有T2个Ci域取值为1。其中，C 0域可以为R域。
第二格式的第一指示信息可以通过比特位图(bitmap)的方式上报链路失败的小区ID。例如，该第一指示信息包括指示域，例如记为Ci域。该Ci域通过bitmap方式指示链路失败的小区的ID(或链路失败的SCell的ID，或链路失败的服务小区的ID)。其中，Ci域仅是一种为区分做的命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定，其中，i为大于0或等于0的整数。
可选地，当Ci域为1时，指示小区ID为i的小区发生链路失败，或者指示SCellIndex i发生链路失败，或者指示ServCellIndex i发生链路失败，或者指示需要链路失败检测的小区中的第i个小区发生链路失败，或者激活的小区中的第i个小区发生链路失败，或者指示网络设备配置给终端设备的服务小区中的第i个小区发生链路失败。
可选地，Ci域还可以指示ID为i的小区对应的new beam info域是否存在。例如，Ci域为1时指示ID为i的小区对应的new beam info域存在。或者Ci域还可以指示SCellIndex i对应的new beam info域存在，或者指示ServCellIndex i对应的new beam info域存在，或者指示需要链路失败检测的小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域存在，或者激活的小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域存在，或者指示网络设备配置给终端设备的服务小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域存在；Ci域为0时指示ID为i的小区对应的new beam info域不存在，或者指示SCellIndex i对应的new beam info域不存在，或者指示ServCellIndex i对应的new beam info域不存在，或者指示需要链路失败检测的小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域不存在，或者激活的小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域不存在，或者指示网络设备配置给终端设备的服务小区中的第i个小区对应的new beam info域不存在。
例如，网络设备配置给某个终端设备的服务小区共有X个，或者网络设备配置给某个终端设备的需要链路失败检测的服务小区共有X个，或者网络设备配置给某个终端设备的可以做链路失败恢复的服务小区共有X个。那么Ci域可以有X个，其中i可以大于或等于1，且i小于或等于X。也就是说，可以通过X个比特指示这些小区中是哪些小区发生了链路失败。
可选地，第二格式的第一指示信息包括的域可能包括以下几种情况。
情况1：第二格式的第一指示信息可以包括：X个Ci域，m个第二域。其中，X个Ci域中共有m个Ci域取值为1，该m个取值为1的Ci域与m个第二域一一对应。m为 小于或等于X的整数。
情况2：第二格式的第一指示信息可以包括：X个Ci域，b个第一域，m个第二域。其中，X个Ci域中共有b个Ci域取值为1，该b个取值为1的Ci域与b个第一域一一对应；b个第一域中共有m个第一域取值为1，该m个取值为1的第一域与m个第二域一一对应。b为小于或等于X的整数,m为小于或等于b的整数。
情况3：第二格式的第一指示信息可以包括：X个Ci域，X个第一域，m个第二域。其中，该X个Ci域与X个第一域一一对应。X个Ci域中共有m1个Ci域取值为1；X个第一域中共有m2个第一域取值为1；有对应关系且取值均为1的Ci域和第一域有m个，该m个取值为1的Ci域和第一域与m个第二域一一对应。m1、m2为小于或等于X的整数。可选地，m1、m2为大于或等于m的整数。
上述一一对应，可以理解为，依次顺序对应。
上述三种情况仅为举例，可能还有其他可能的情况，本申请实施例不做限制。
示例性地，X＝31，那么通过31bit指示链路失败的小区ID，如C5域、C7域均为1，指示小区ID为5的小区和小区ID为7的小区发生链路失败。
其中，B域、new beam info域、以及预留比特位，可参考第一指示信息的格式为第一格式中的描述(即上文“1)”中关于第一格式的描述)，此处不再赘述。
同样，第一指示信息为第二格式时，可以有多种形式，图12至图14三种可能的形式。
例如，以图12为例。
服务小区ID域指示m个小区的ID(可以理解为服务小区ID域中有m个Ci域取值为1)，可以理解为，该m个小区发生链路失败，其中，m为大于1或等于1的整数。服务小区ID域指示m个小区的ID，相应地，该m个小区对应m个第二域。示例性地，图12中包括预留字段R，图12可以包括m个第二域，为区分，分别记为第二域1、第二域2、……。其中，C 0域可以为R域，也就是说，C 0域可以包括预留字段。
又如，以图13为例。
服务小区ID域指示(m+1)个小区的ID(可以理解为服务小区ID域中有(m+1)个Ci域取值为1)，可以理解为，该(m+1)个小区发生链路失败。服务小区ID域指示(m+1)小区的ID，相应地，该(m+1)个小区对应(m+1)个第二域。示例性地，图13中不包括预留字段R，图13可以包括(m+1)个第二域，为区分，分别记为第二域a0、第二域a1、第二域a2、第二域am、……。其中，C 0域可以为R域，也就是说，C 0域可以包括预留字段。
又如，以图14为例。
服务小区ID域指示p1个小区的ID(可以理解为服务小区ID域中有p1个Ci域取值为1)，可以理解为，该p1个小区发生链路失败，其中，p1为大于1或等于1的整数。服务小区ID域指示p1个小区的ID。相应地，该p1个小区可以对应p2个第一域(Bi域)，其中p2为大于1或等于1的整数。
可选地，p2可以等于p1，B bj域对应服务小区ID域指示的链路失败的小区中的第j个小区，B bj可以等于B j，其中，B bj表示第bj个B域，例如，bj＝1，B bj表示第一个B域，即B 1(即j＝1)。或者，p2可以等于X，B bj域对应X个小区中的第b j个小区。相应的，该p2个第一域指示有m个第二域(可以理解为有m个Bi域取值为1)。该m个第一域 分别顺序对应B bj域值为1对应的小区。示例性地，图14中包括预留字段R，图14可以包括m个第二域，为区分，分别记为第二域a1、第二域a2、……。
上述结合图12至图14示例性地介绍了第一指示信息的格式为第二格式的几种可能的形式，应理解，本申请实施例并未限定于此。
可选地，在终端设备无法识别出用于恢复链路失败小区的参考信号的情况下，上述第一格式或第二格式的第一指示信息指示用于恢复链路失败小区的参考信号信息的方式可以包括以下两种方式中的任一种。
方式1：第一指示信息不包括B域，包括new beam info域，该new beam info域指示用于恢复链路失败小区的参考信号信息，当终端设备识别出大于链路失败恢复门限的参考信号时，该new beam info域可以指示某个参考信号的资源索引等信息；否则，该new beam info域可以是指示不存在大于链路失败恢复门限的参考信号(或者称为没有识别出恢复链路失败小区的参考信号)的特殊状态值。
方式2：第一指示信息包括B域和new beam info域，该B域指示是否存在大于链路失败恢复门限的参考信号(或者是否识别出恢复链路失败小区的参考信号)。若B域指示识别出恢复链路失败小区的参考信号，则存在new beam info域，且该new beam info域指示用于恢复链路失败小区的某个参考信号的资源索引等信息。
上文示例性地介绍了两种格式，第一格式(即第一格式)和第二格式(即第二格式)，应理解，本申请实施例并未限定于此。例如，还可以划分更细。如可以包括第一格式、第二格式、第三格式。第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数，第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第三格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数。或者，第一格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数小于第二格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数，第二格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数小于第三格式的第一指示信息指示的链路失败小区的个数。或者，第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载，第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第三格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
应理解，上述比特数、链路失败小区的信息的个数、负载，均可以指最大值。例如，第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数，表示该格式下的第一指示信息可以发送的最大比特数。
下面介绍基于链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式。
可选地，链路失败小区的情况，可以包括以下一项或多项：链路失败小区的个数、链路失败小区的信息的负载(payload)、是否识别出用于恢复所述链路失败小区的参考信号的情况，等等。
可以理解，可以基于以下一项或多项确定第一指示信息的格式：链路失败小区的个数、链路失败小区的信息的负载、或是否识别出用于恢复所述链路失败小区的参考信号的情况，等等。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式可以是终端设备基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，也可以是网络设备基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式可以是直接基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，也可以是间接基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
下面结合几种可能的实现方式说明。
实现方式1，终端设备根据链路失败小区的情况，确定第一指示信息的格式。
示例性地，多个格式与链路失败小区的情况具有对应关系，为区分，记为第一对应关系。
可以理解为，终端设备可以根据链路失败小区的情况，并结合该第一对应关系，确定第一指示信息的格式。该第一对应关系可以是预先设置好的，如网络设备配置或协议规定的，也可以是预先保存的，对此不作限定。
该第一对应关系的形式可以为：多个格式与链路失败小区的个数之间的对应关系。终端设备可以根据该多个格式与链路失败小区的个数之间的对应关系，基于链路失败小区的个数，采用相应格式的第一指示信息。
例如，当链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值时，第一指示信息的格式可以为第一格式；当链路失败小区的个数大于预设的第一阈值时，第一指示信息的格式可以为第二格式。其中，预设的第一阈值可以是预先定义的，如协议或网络设备预先定义；或者也可以是网络设备为终端设备配置好的；或者也可以是经验值等，对此不作限定。
或者，该第一对应关系的形式可以为：多个格式与链路失败小区的信息的负载之间的对应关系。终端设备可以根据该多个格式与链路失败小区的信息的负载之间的对应关系，基于链路失败小区的信息的负载，采用相应格式的第一指示信息。
例如，当链路失败小区的信息的负载小于或等于预设的第二阈值时，第一指示信息的格式可以为第一格式；当链路失败小区的信息的负载大于预设的第二阈值时，第一指示信息的格式可以为第二格式。其中，预设的第二阈值可以是预先定义的，如协议或网络设备预先定义；或者也可以是网络设备为终端设备配置好的；或者也可以是经验值等，对此不作限定。
基于上述实现方式1，终端设备可以根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式。
实现方式2，终端设备根据承载第二指示信息的资源，确定第一指示信息的格式。
示例性地，多个格式与承载第二指示信息的资源具有对应关系，为区分，记为第二对应关系。
可选地，终端设备确定小区链路失败后，可以向网络设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息指示小区链路失败。例如，终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息，用于通知网络设备发生小区链路失败。
可选地，第二指示信息还可以用于请求承载第一指示信息的资源。
应理解，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息和第二指示信息均是当有小区发生链路失败，终端设备向网络设备发送的用于恢复链路失败小区的信息，它们可以统称为链路失败恢复请求信息。终端设备发送波束失败恢复请求信息的方式可以包括多种方式，下文详细描述。
为区分且不失一般性，将承载第一指示信息的资源记为第一资源，将承载第二指示信息的资源记为第二资源。第一资源可以为PUCCH资源，也可以是PUSCH资源；第二资源可以为PUCCH资源，也可以是物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel，PRACH)资源，对此不作限定。
应理解，第一资源和第二资源仅是为区分做的命名，本领域技术人员应理解其含义。例如，终端设备向网络设备请求分配第一资源时，表示终端设备请求网络设备分配用于承载第一指示信息的资源，并不代表请求特定的某块资源。又如，网络设备为终端设备分配第一资源时，表示网络设备为终端设备分配了用于承载第一指示信息的某块资源，可以表示特定的某块资源。
其中，第二资源不仅可以用于承载第二指示信息，此外，第二资源还可以承载数据，等等。
其中，第一资源不仅可以用于承载第一指示信息，此外，第一资源还可以用于承载数据或者其他信息。或者，第一资源也可以仅用于承载第一指示信息。对此不作限定。
终端设备可以根据承载第二指示信息的资源，并结合第二对应关系，确定第一指示信息的格式。该第二对应关系可以是预先设置好的，如网络设备配置或协议规定的，也可以是预先保存的，对此不作限定。
示例性地，可以配置两个第二资源，分别记为第二资源#1和第二资源#2。例如，第二资源#1和第二资源#2可以通过循环移位(cycle shift)区分。或者，也可以通过其它方式区分(例如，可以通过频分区分；或可以通过时分区分；或可以通过码分区分)，对此不作限定。
第二资源#1和第二资源#2分别关联或对应不同格式的第一指示信息，终端设备根据承载第二指示信息的资源是第二资源#1，还是第二资源#2，确定第一指示信息的格式。
关联或对应的形式可以有多种。
例如，第二资源#1对应第一格式的第一指示信息，第二资源#2对应第二格式的第一指示信息；或者说，第二资源#1对应的第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，第二资源#2对应的第一指示信息的格式为第二格式。又如，第二资源#1关联较小payload的第一指示信息，第二资源#2关联较大payload的第一指示信息。又如，第二资源#1关联请求较小资源(即较小的第一资源)的第一指示信息，第二资源#2关联请求较大资源(即较大的第一资源)的第一指示信息。又如，第二资源#1对应最多承载A个小区的信息的第一指示信息，第二资源#2对应最多承载B个小区的信息的第一指示信息。
应理解，上述只是列举出的几种可能的关联或对应的形式，本申请实施例并未限定于此，任何属于上述形式的变形形式都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。
其中，A、B都为大于1或等于1的整数，且A小于B。A、B的具体取值，本申请实施例不作限定。A、B可以是网络设备或协议预先规定的，或者也可以是网络设备配置的，或者，也可以是终端设备自身计算出来的。例如，
Figure PCTCN2020105763-appb-000009
B＝X，其中，X为网络设备配置给终端设备的服务小区(最多)的个数，或者网络设备配置给终端设备的需要链路失败检测的服务小区(最多)的个数，或者网络设备配置给某个终端设备的可以做链路失败恢复的服务小区(最多)的个数。又如，A＝1，B大于1。
示例性地，当终端设备使用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息时，终端设备发送的第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，即终端设备发送第一格式的第一指示信息；当终端设备使用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息时，终端设备发送的第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，即终端设备发送第二格式的第一指示信息。关于第一格式和第二格式，参考上文描述，此处不再赘述。
终端设备可以基于链路失败小区的情况，确定使用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息，还是使用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息。可以理解为，终端设备可以基于链路失败小区的情况，结合上述几种可能的关联或对应的形式，确定使用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息，还是使用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息。
关于链路失败小区的情况，可以参考上文描述，此处不再赘述。
例如，当链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值时，终端设备采用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息；当链路失败小区的个数大于预设的第一阈值时，终端设备采用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息。通过该第二指示信息通知网络设备小区链路失败，也可以通过该第二指示信息请求承载第一指示信息的资源。
图15列出了第二资源与第一指示信息的格式的一示意图。假设第二资源#1(例如PUCCH，如可以记为PUCCH 1)对应第一格式的第一指示信息，第二资源#2(例如PUCCH，如可以记为PUCCH 1)对应第二格式的第一指示信息。第一格式的第一指示信息，例如可以为图6至图11中所示的第一格式的MAC-CE；第二格式的第一指示信息，例如可以为图12至图14中所示的第二格式的MAC-CE。如图15所示，第一格式的第一指示信息可以包括一个服务小区ID域和一个第二域，如分别记为SCell ID#a和波束(beam)#b。第二格式的第一指示信息可以包括一个服务小区ID域，该服务小区ID域可以包括：一个或多个Ci域(即小区的个数)以及对应的一个或多个第二域，如分别记为SCell ID#a1和beam#b1、SCell ID#a2和beam#b2、等等。
例如，当终端设备确定一个小区发生链路失败时，通过第二资源#1发送第二指示信息，并发送第一格式的第一指示信息。当终端设备确定5个小区发生链路失败时，通过第二资源#2发送第二指示信息，并发送第二格式的第一指示信息。图15中仅示出了终端设备通过第二资源#2发送第二指示信息的情况，且第一指示信息的格式为第二格式。
又如，当链路失败的小区信息的payload小于或等于预设的第二阈值时，终端设备采用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息；当链路失败的小区信息的payload大于预设的第二阈值时，终端设备采用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息。通过该第二指示信息通知网络设备小区链路失败，也可以通过该第二指示信息请求承载第一指示信息的资源。
基于上述实现方式2，终端设备可以根据链路失败小区的情况确定承载第二指示信息的资源，继而根据承载第二指示信息的资源确定第一指示信息的格式。也可以理解为，终端设备可以间接的根据链路失败小区的情况，确定第一指示信息的格式。
实现方式3，终端设备根据第二指示信息，确定第一指示信息的格式。
示例性地，多个格式与第二指示信息具有对应关系，或者说，多个格式与第二指示信息的多个状态值具有对应关系，或者说，多个格式与第二指示信息的序列的不同循环移位具有对应关系，为区分，记为第三对应关系。
可以理解为，终端设备可以根据第二指示信息，并结合该第三对应关系，确定第一指示信息的格式。该第三对应关系可以是预先设置好的，如网络设备配置或协议规定的，也可以是预先保存的，对此不作限定。
例如，网络设备配置一个第三资源，终端设备在该第三资源上发送第二指示信息。当该第二指示信息的状态值为第一取值时，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式；当该第二指示信息的状态值为第二取值时，第一指示信息的格式为第二格式。
应理解，第三资源仅是为区分做的命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
还应理解，第一取值和第二取值不同，第一取值和第二取值仅是为区分做的命名，并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。
又如，网络设备配置一个第三资源，终端设备在该第三资源上发送第二指示信息。当承载该第二指示信息的序列的循环移位为第一循环移位时，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式；当承载该第二指示信息的序列的循环移位为第二循环移位时，第一指示信息的格式为第二格式。
基于上述实现方式3，终端设备可以根据第二指示信息的内容，如第二指示信息的序列的循环移位或状态值等，确定第一指示信息的格式。
实现方式4，终端设备根据网络设备分配的资源的大小，确定第一指示信息的格式。
例如，当网络设备为终端设备分配较小的资源来承载第一指示信息时，终端设备发送第一格式的第一指示信息；当网络设备为终端设备分配较大的资源来承载第一指示信息时，终端设备发送第二格式的第一指示信息。
根据上文关于第一格式和第二格式的描述，如第一格式为短格式，第二格式为长格式；以及，第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数；以及，第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载，等等，可以理解，第一格式的第一指示信息所需要的资源可能大于第二格式的第一指示信息所需要的资源。那么在实现方式4下，终端设备可以根据网络设备分配的资源的大小，确定第一指示信息的格式，也可以理解为，如果该资源能承载第二格式的第一指示信息，确定第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，即发送第二格式的第一指示信息；否则，如果该资源能承载第一格式的第一指示信息，确定第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，即发送第一格式的第一指示信息。或者，也可以理解为，在资源能够承载第二格式的第一指示信息时，确定第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，即发送第二格式的第一指示信息；否则确定第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，即发送第一格式的第一指示信息。换句话说，在资源能够承载第二格式的第一指示信息时，确定第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，即发送第二格式的第一指示信息；如果该资源不能承载第二格式的第一指示信息、且能承载第一格式的第一指示信息，则确定第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，即发送第一格式的第一指示信息。如根据上段例子，如果分配较大的资源，终端设备可以用该较大的资源来发送第二格式的第一指示信息；如果分配较小的资源，终端设备可以用该较小的资源来发送第一格式的第一指示信息。
应理解，在该实现方式下，终端设备可以发送第二指示信息，也可以不发送第二指示信息。
该实现方式4可以单独使用，也可以结合实现方式1、或实现方式2、或实现方式3一起使用。例如，实现方式4和实现方式3结合时，终端设备可以先向网络设备发送第二指示信息，网络设备可以根据承载第二指示信息的资源或第二指示信息的内容，为终端设备分配合适大小的资源。继而终端设备可以根据网络设备分配的资源的大小，确定第一指示信息的格式。
关于网络设备分配用于承载第一指示信息的资源，结合方案二说明。
上述示例性地介绍了几种确定第一指示信息的格式的实现方式，本申请实施例并未限 定于此。任何可以使得终端设备直接根据链路失败小区的情况或者间接根据链路失败小区的情况，确定第一指示信息的格式的方式都落入本申请实施例的范围。例如，上述各个实现方式可以单独使用，也可以结合使用。
基于上述方案一，第一指示信息的格式可以基于链路失败小区的情况确定，从而可以选择较合适的格式，降低资源的浪费。例如，终端设备可以根据即将要传输的链路失败的小区信息的payload，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据发生链路失败的小区的个数，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据将要传输的链路失败的小区信息和数据的payload，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据用于承载第一指示信息的资源的大小，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据用于承载第二指示信息的资源，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据第二指示信息，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备根据网络设备分配的资源的大小，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以按照网络设备配置的格式发送相应格式的第一指示信息。
上文主要介绍了方案一，包括第一指示信息的格式以及确定第一指示信息的格式的几种实现方式，下文开始介绍方案二。
方案二、承载第一指示信息的资源是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
承载第一指示信息的资源是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，还可以理解为，承载第一指示信息的资源大小是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，网络设备可以根据承载第二指示信息的资源，为终端设备分配承载第一指示信息的资源。或者，可以理解为，承载第一指示信息的资源可以是基于第二指示信息的响应信息指示或激活的。第二指示信息的响应信息也可以理解为第三指示信息。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备在接收到第二指示信息之后，可以发送该第二指示信息的响应信息。该第二指示信息的响应信息可以指示为该终端设备分配的第一资源，即网络设备为该终端设备分配的承载第一指示信息的资源。承载第一指示信息的资源可以是非周期资源(或称为动态资源)。
该可能的实现方式下，网络设备可以根据当前网络中是否有链路失败的小区(通过第二指示信息指示)来确定是否要分配承载第一指示信息的资源。如果网络设备接收到第二指示信息，即可获知当前网络中有发生链路失败的小区，网络设备即可动态的分配承载第一指示信息的资源，以便终端设备进一步上报有哪些小区发生链路失败，和/或，上报恢复链路失败小区的新链路的信息(参考信号信息)。
如前所述，承载第二指示信息的资源可以基于链路失败小区的情况确定，承载第一指示信息的资源可以由第二指示信息确定，那么可以理解为，承载第一指示信息的资源(或称为资源大小)也可以间接地基于链路失败小区的情况确定。或者说，承载第二指示信息的资源和承载第一指示信息的资源(或称为资源大小)，均是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
示例性地，承载第一指示信息的资源与承载第二指示信息的资源具有对应关系，为区分，记为第四对应关系。
可以理解为，网络设备可以根据承载第二指示信息的资源，并结合第四对应关系，为终端设备分配承载第一指示信息的资源。该第四对应关系可以是预先设置好的，如网络设 备配置或协议规定的，也可以是预先保存的，对此不作限定。
仍以第二资源#1和第二资源#2为例进行说明。
例如，终端设备使用第二资源#1发送第二指示信息时，网络设备为终端设备分配较小的资源以承载第一指示信息；终端设备使用第二资源#2发送第二指示信息时，网络设备为终端设备分配较大的资源以承载第一指示信息。
由于链路失败事件是突发事件，通过该可能的实现方式，不需要提前预留发送链路失败恢复请求信息的周期资源，可以有效节省资源开销。此外由于链路失败事件是突发事件，发生链路失败的小区的个数也是不确定的，通过该可能的实现方式，可以使得网络设备分配合适大小的资源承载第一指示信息，可以有效节省资源开销，提高资源利用率。
又一种可能的实现方式，该第二指示信息的响应信息还可以用于激活承载第一指示信息的资源。
网络设备可以预先为终端设备分配承载第一指示信息的资源，由该第二指示信息的响应信息触发激活。该激活的承载第一指示信息的资源可以为半静态资源(semi-persistent)或静态资源(periodic)。
例如，承载第一指示信息的资源可以是由第二指示信息的响应信息或第二指示信息后的DCI激活的半静态资源或静态资源(例如PUSCH、PUCCH、或PRACH)。
该可能的实现方式下，网络设备根据当前网络中是否有链路失败的小区(通过第二指示信息指示)来确定是否要激活承载第一指示信息的资源。如果网络设备接收到第二指示信息，即可获知当前网络中有发生链路失败的小区，网络设备激活承载第一指示信息的资源，以便终端设备进一步上报有哪些小区发生链路失败，和/或，上报恢复链路失败小区的新链路的信息(参考信号信息)。
可选地，承载第一指示信息的资源可以是高层信令或系统信息配置的，或为预设资源。
例如，承载第一指示信息的资源可以是由网络设备为该终端设备配置的，并通过高层信令或系统信息发送给终端设备。承载第一指示信息的资源还可以是网络设备和终端设备预先约定的，或者由终端设备提前设定，本申请对此不进行限定。
可选地，承载第一指示信息的资源还可以是与承载第二指示信息的资源(第二资源)具有关联关系的资源，为区分，记为第五对应关系。以第二资源#1和第二资源#2为例，例如，第二资源#1关联较小的承载第一指示信息的资源；第二资源#2关联较大的承载第一指示信息的资源。
可以理解为，终端设备在获知承载第二指示信息的资源的情况下，并结合第五对应关系，就可以确定出承载第一指示信息的资源。该第五对应关系可以是预先设置好的，如网络设备配置或协议规定的，也可以是预先保存的，对此不作限定。
示例性地，承载第二指示信息的资源和承载第一指示信息的资源的关联关系可以由主信息块(master information block，MIB)或系统消息块(system information block，SIB)等系统信息配置，或者，也可以由RRC或MAC-CE信令配置。该系统信息或信令可以在发送第二指示信息之前发送。
示例性地，该承载第二指示信息的资源和承载第一指示信息的资源的配置也可以通过上述系统信息或信令配置。
可选地，网络设备可以为终端设备配置多个资源用于传输第二指示信息，以及为终端 设备配置多个资源用于传输第一指示信息，终端设备可以从该多个用于传输第二指示信息的资源中选择一个或多个作为承载第二指示信息的资源，还可以从多个用于传输第一指示信息的资源中选择一个或多个作为承载第一指示信息的资源。其中，该多个用于传输第二指示信息的资源可以由上述MIB或SIB等系统信息配置，或者由RRC或MAC-CE等信令配置。该该多个用于传输第一指示信息的资源也可以由上述MIB或SIB等系统信息配置，或者由RRC或MAC-CE等信令配置。
可选地，该承载第一指示信息的资源还可以是与承载第二指示信息的资源关联的资源。可选地，网络设备可以通过MIB或SIB等系统信息，或者通过RRC或MAC-CE信令，配置多个用于承载第二指示信息的资源和多个用于承载第一指示信息的资源，以及该多个用于承载第二指示信息的资源与多个用于承载第一指示信息资源的关联关系，终端设备可以从该多个用于承载第二指示信息的资源中选择一个作为承载第二指示信息的资源，还可以从多个用于承载第一指示信息的资源中选择一个作为承载第一指示信息的资源。每个承载第二指示信息的资源可以关联一个或多个承载第一指示信息的资源，每个承载第二指示信息的资源关联的承载第一指示信息的资源可以大小不同。终端设备在哪个承载第二指示信息的资源发送第二指示信息，那么，终端设备就在与该承载第二指示信息的资源关联的承载第一指示信息的资源上发送第一指示信息。
通过该可能的实现方式，可以不用通过第二指示信息的响应信息分配的资源发送第一指示信息，而是直接在该承载第一指示信息的资源上发送，可以有效减小链路恢复时延，提高链路恢复速度。
基于上述方案二，承载第一指示信息的资源可以基于链路失败小区的情况确定，从而可以合理地分配资源，降低资源的浪费。
应理解，上述方案一和方案二可以单独使用，也可以结合使用。
基于本申请实施例，终端设备发送的第一指示信息，即指示链路失败小区的信息的第一指示信息，可以是基于链路失败小区的情况生成的。例如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定将要发送的第一指示信息的格式，也就是说，通过设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，可以使得终端设备自适应调整其发送的第一指示信息的大小或格式，有效减小冗余信息的上报，降低上报开销。又如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定承载第一指示信息的资源，可以使得合理的分配承载第一指示信息的资源，降低资源的浪费，提高资源利用率。
如上文所述，本申请实施例中的第一指示信息和第二指示信息均是当有小区发生链路失败，终端设备向网络设备发送的用于恢复链路失败小区的信息，它们可以统称为链路失败恢复请求信息或波束失败恢复请求信息。
本申请实施例中，波束失败恢复请求信息可以仅包括第一指示信息，或者，波束失败请求消息可以包括第一指示信息和第二指示信息。终端设备可以通过以下任一方式发送波束失败恢复请求信息。
方式A
波束失败恢复请求信息包括第一指示信息。该种方式可以仅通过一步上报波束失败恢复请求信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第一指示信息指示：链路失败小区的标识，和/或，用 于恢复链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
示例性地，该第一指示信息可以指示：链路失败的N个小区的小区标识，和/或，用于恢复该N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息。其中，M和N均为大于或等于1的整数。
应理解，在该种实现方式中，该第一指示信息可以包括：链路失败的N个小区的小区标识信息，和/或，用于恢复所述N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息。
可选地，该方式A可以应用于第一指示信息承载在PUSCH的情况，例如第一指示信息为MAC-CE的情况。
方式B：
波束失败恢复请求信息包括第一指示信息和第二指示信息。该种方式可以通过两步上报波束失败恢复请求信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该第二指示信息指示小区链路失败；该第一指示信息指示：链路失败小区的标识，和/或，用于恢复链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
示例性地，该第二指示信息可以指示小区链路失败；该第一指示信息可以指示：链路失败的N个小区的小区标识，和/或，用于恢复该N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息；其中，M和N均为大于或等于1的整数。
示例性地，该第二指示信息可以指示：L个小区中的至少一个小区的链路失败，其中L为大于1的整数；该第一指示信息指示：L个小区中的N个小区的小区标识，和/或，用于恢复该N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息；其中，M和N均为大于或等于1的整数。
应理解，在该种实现方式中，第一指示信息可以包括：L个小区中的N个小区的小区标识，和/或，用于恢复N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息。
方式C：
波束失败恢复请求信息包括第一指示信息和第二指示信息。该种方式可以通过两步上报波束失败恢复请求信息。
在一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息指示链路失败小区的标识，第一指示信息指示用于恢复链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
示例性地，第二指示信息指示链路失败的N个小区的小区标识；第一指示信息指示用于恢复N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息；其中，M和N均为大于或等于1的整数。
应理解，在该种实现方式中，第一指示信息可以包括所述用于恢复N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息。
应理解，方式B和方式C中的第二指示信息还可以称为调度请求信息，或者该第二指示信息可以与调度请求信息采用相同的格式。
可选地，方式B和方式C中的承载第二指示信息的资源可以为PRACH资源，或者可以为PUCCH资源。
可选地，方式A、方式B和方式C中的承载第一指示信息的资源可以为PUSCH资源，或者可以为PUCCH资源。
可选地，方式A、方式B和方式C中的参考信号资源可以是CSI-RS资源，或者也可以可以是SSB资源。
应理解，本申请实施例中，“指示小区链路失败”可以理解为“指示至少有一个小区发生链路失败”，还可以理解为“指示存在链路失败的小区”。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“链路失败的N个小区的小区标识”和/或“用于恢复链路失败的N个小区的链路的M个参考信号信息”可以统称为“链路失败小区的信息”。或者说，链路失败小区的信息包括：链路失败小区的标识，和或，用于恢复链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
还应理解，在本申请实施例中，对N、M的大小关系不做限定。链路失败恢复请求消息中上报的链路失败的N个小区和M个参考信号信息之间可以有多种对应关系。例如：一个小区对应一个参考信号信息；或者一个小区对应零个参考信号信息；或者，一个小区对应多个参考信号信息；又或者，一个参考信号信息对应多个小区，本申请对此不做限定。
图16示出了一个具体的示例，方法1600可以包括如下步骤。
1610，终端设备确定链路失败。
也就是说，终端设备确定至少一个小区链路失败。
例如，终端设备测量波束失败检测的参考信号资源，确定该终端设备与网络设备之间的链路失败。
该步骤1610同方法500中的步骤510相似。此处不再赘述。
1620，终端设备识别新链路。
终端设备测量参考信号资源，识别出用于恢复终端设备与网络设备之间的链路的参考信号。
例如，终端设备根据候选参考信号集合(candidate beam identification RS)的信道质量信息(如RSRP，CQI，BLER，SINR，SNR等)，确定信道质量大于或者等于链路失败恢复门限的参考信号(new identified beam)。这里的确定过程可以是测量该候选参考信号集合的信道质量信息确定的。
可选地，方法1600还可以包括步骤1630。
1630，终端设备发送第二指示信息。
其中，该第二指示信息可以指示小区链路失败。
该第二指示信息也可以称为第二链路失败恢复请求信息，也可以称为调度请求信息，或者该第二指示信息可以与调度请求信息采用相同的格式。其只是一种命名，并不对本申请实施的保护范围造成限定。承载第二指示信息的资源可以为PRACH资源，或者可以为PUCCH资源。
第二指示信息还可以指示链路失败小区的情况。例如，第二指示信息还可以指示以下一项或多项：或链路失败小区的个数、链路失败小区的信息的比特数、负载等。应理解，第二指示信息仅可以指示链路失败小区的情况的大致范围，而无法指示具体的情况(也即第二指示信息仅可以指示粗粒度的链路失败小区的情况)。例如：第二指示信息可以指示当前链路失败小区的个数是1个，或是多个。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备配置两个第二资源，如第二资源#1和第二资源#2，可以用于承载第二指示信息。终端设备可以根据链路失败小区的情况，选择第二资源#1或第二资源#2，发送第二指示信息。
又一种可能的实现方式，网络设备配置一个第二资源用于承载第二指示信息。终端设备可以根据链路失败小区的情况，确定第二指示信息(如确定第二指示信息的取值或第二指示信息为哪个序列)。
关于第二指示信息以及承载第二指示信息的资源，可以参考方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
应理解，该承载第一指示信息的资源可以是基于第二指示信息的响应信息指示或激活的。
一种可能的实现方式，网络设备在接收到第二指示信息之后，可以发送该第二指示信息的响应信息。该第二指示信息的响应信息(例如记作第三指示信息)可以指示为该终端设备分配的第一资源，即网络设备为该终端设备分配的承载第一指示信息资源。
另一种可能的实现方式，该第二指示信息的响应信息还可以用于激活承载第一指示信息的资源。网络设备可以预先为终端设备分配承载第一指示信息的资源，由该第二指示信息的响应信息触发激活。
具体的可以参考上述方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
可选地，方法1600还可以包括步骤1640。
1640，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息。
该第三指示信息指示承载第一指示信息的资源。或者，该第三指示信息可以理解为针对第二指示信息的响应。
示例性地，该承载第一指示信息的资源，可以是网络设备基于第二指示信息为终端设备分配的资源。或者，也可以理解为动态资源。
示例性地，网络设备可以预先为终端设备分配承载第一指示信息的资源，由该第二指示信息的响应信息触发激活。该激活的承载第一指示信息的资源可以为半静态资源或静态资源。
具体的可以参考上述方法500中方案二的描述，此处不再赘述。
1650，终端设备发送第一指示信息。
第一指示信息可以指示发生链路失败的小区的信息。例如，第一指示信息指示链路失败的T2个小区的小区ID，和/或，恢复该T2个小区的链路的T4个参考信号信息。
关于第一指示信息，可以参考方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
终端设备可以基于确定的第一指示信息的格式发送第一指示信息。例如，终端设备可以根据即将要传输的链路失败的小区信息的payload，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据发生链路失败的小区的个数，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据将要传输的链路失败的小区信息和数据的payload，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以根据用于承载第一指示信息的资源的大小，发送相应格式的第一指示信息。又如，终端设备可以按照网络设备配置的格式发送相应格式的第一指示信息。
关于第一指示信息的格式，可以参考方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
终端设备发送该第一指示信息的资源，可以基于发送第二指示信息，或者基于承载第二指示信息的资源确定。关于承载第一指示信息的资源，可以参考方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
或者，终端设备也可以在某个PUSCH资源上发送第一指示信息。
该步骤1650同方法500中的步骤520相似。此处不再赘述。
可选地，方法1600还可以包括步骤1660。
1660，网络设备向终端设备发送链路恢复响应消息。
应理解，方法1600中涉及的信息，如第一指示信息、第二指示信息等，可以参考方法500中的描述，此处不再赘述。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“第一指示信息”可替换为“MAC-CE”。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“小区”可以理解为“服务小区”、“载波”。
可选地，小区包括下行载波、上行(uplink,UL)载波、上行补充(supplementary uplink，SUL)载波中的至少一个。具体地，小区可以包括下行载波、上行载波；或者小区可以包括下行载波、上行补充载波；或者小区包括下行载波、上行载波、上行补充载波。
可选地，上行补充载波的载频低于上行载波，用以提高上行覆盖。
可选地，一般情况下，FDD系统中，上行载波与下行载波的载频不同；TDD系统中，上行载波与下行载波的载频相同。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，上行资源在上行载波上；下行资源在下行载波上。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，上行载波可以是正常的上行载波，还可以是补充上行(supplementary uplink，SUL)载波。
还应理解，本申请实施例中的“检测”可以理解为“接收”，还可以理解为“解码”。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，时间单元可以是LTE或者5G NR系统中定义的一个或多个无线帧，一个或多个子帧，一个或多个时隙，一个或多个微时隙(mini slot)，一个或多个正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号等，也可以是多个帧或子帧构成的时间窗口，例如系统信息(system information，SI)窗口。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“小区标识”还可以替换为“小区索引”。
还应理解，在本申请实施例中，“当……时”，并不意味着一定同时发生，除非特殊说明，否则其表示“在……情况下”。例如，“当B域为1时”，其表示在B域为1的情况下。又如，第一指示信息和第二指示信息均是当有小区发生链路失败，终端设备向网络设备发送的用于恢复链路失败小区的信息，其表示，第一指示信息和第二指示信息均是在有小区发生链路失败的情况下，终端设备向网络设备发送的用于恢复链路失败小区的信息，其并不是说，小区发生链路失败的同时，终端设备向网络设备发送的用于恢复链路失败小区的信息。
还应理解，本申请实施例中，“第二资源、第三资源可以为主小区或辅助主小区的资源，还可以为网络设备配置给终端设备的专用于恢复链路失败小区的资源(或者可以为网络设备配置给终端设备的专用于恢复链路失败的辅小区的资源)。“第一资源”为哪个小区的资源可以取决于网络设备的调度，或网络设备的指示。“第一资源与第二资源、第三资源可以为相同小区的资源或不同小区的资源。“第一指示信息”、“第二指示信息”可以为用于恢复辅小区和或特殊小区的链路失败的指示信息。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备发送的第一指示信息，即指示链路失败小区的信息的第一指示信息，可以是基于链路失败小区的情况生成的。例如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定将要发送的第一指示信息的格式，也就是说，通过设计可变长度的信息格式指示链路失败的小区信息，可以使得终端设备自适应调整其发送的第一指示信息的大小或格式，有效减小冗余信息的上报，降低上报开销。又如，基于链路失败小区的情况确定承载第一指示信息的资源，可以使得合理的分配承载第一指示信息的资源，降低资源的浪费，提高资源 利用率。
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案，也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合，这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。
可以理解的是，上述各个方法实施例中，由终端设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，由网络设备实现的方法和操作，也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。
以上，结合图5至图16详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下，结合图17至图20详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。应理解，装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应，因此，未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，各个网元，例如发射端设备或者接收端设备，为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。
图17是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图所示，该通信装置1700可以包括通信单元1710和处理单元1720。通信单元1710可以与外部进行通信，处理单元1720用于进行数据处理。通信单元1710还可以称为通信接口或收发单元。通信接口用于输入和/或输出信息，信息包括指令和数据中的至少一项。可选地，该通信装置可以为芯片或芯片系统。当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时，通信接口可以是输入/输出接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。
在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1700可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备执行的步骤或者流程，例如，可以为终端设备，或者配置于终端设备中的芯片或电路或芯片系统。这时，该通信装置1700可以称为终端设备。通信单元1710用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的收发相关操作，处理单元1720用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备的处理相关操作。
一种可能的实现方式，处理单元1720用于：确定至少一个小区的链路失败；通信单元1710用于：发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，其中，该第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，在发送第一指示信息之前，通信单元1710还用于：根据链路失败小区的情 况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息指示小区链路失败。
可选地，第二指示信息用于请求承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，通信单元1710具体用于：在第三资源上发送第二指示信息，其中，第二指示信息用于请求承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，通信单元1710还用于：接收第三指示信息，第三指示信息指示承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，第一资源承载对应格式的第一指示信息。
可选地，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：第一指示信息的格式是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载第一指示信息的资源是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，第一格式和第二格式满足以下一项或多项：第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数；第一格式的第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，第二格式的第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；或，第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，在链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在链路失败小区的情况不满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示链路失败小区的标识。
可选地，预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
可选地，链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
又一种可能的实现方式，处理单元1720用于：确定至少一个小区的链路失败；处理单元1720还用于：根据链路失败小区的情况确定第一指示信息的格式，第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息；通信单元1710用于：发送第一指示信息。
可选地，第一资源承载对应格式的第一指示信息。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，第一格式和第二格式满足以下一项或多项：第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数；第一格式的第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，第二格式的第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数， 且N1<N2；或，第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，在链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在链路失败小区的情况不满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示链路失败小区的标识。
可选地，预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
可选地，链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
该通信装置1700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500和方法1600中的终端设备执行的步骤或者流程，该通信装置1700可以包括用于执行图5中的方法500和图16中方法1600中的终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500和图16中方法1600的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置1700用于执行图5中的方法500时，通信单元1710可用于执行方法500中的步骤520，处理单元1720可用于执行方法500中的步骤510。
当该通信装置1700用于执行图16中的方法1600时，通信单元1710可用于执行方法1600中的步骤1630、步骤1640、步骤1650、步骤1660，处理单元1720可用于执行方法1600中的步骤1610和步骤1620。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1700中的通信单元1710可通过图19中示出的终端设备1900中的收发器1910实现，该通信装置1700中的处理单元1720可通过图19中示出的终端设备1900中的处理器1920实现。其中，收发器可以包括发射器和/或接收器，分别实现发送单元和接收单元的功能。
还应理解，该通信装置1700中的通信单元1710也可以为输入/输出接口。
在另一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1700可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备执行的步骤或者流程，例如，可以为网络设备，或者配置于网络设备中的芯片或电路或芯片系统。这时，该通信装置1700可以称为网络设备。通信单元1710用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的收发相关操作，处理单元1720用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备的处理相关操作。
一种可能的实现方式，通信单元1710用于：接收第一指示信息，第一指示信息指示 链路失败小区的信息，第一指示信息或第一指示信息的格式是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；处理单元1720用于：基于第一指示信息，恢复链路失败小区的链路。
可选地，在接收所述第一指示信息之前，通信单元1710用于：接收第二指示信息，承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息是根据链路失败小区的情况确定的，第二指示信息指示小区链路失败；处理单元1720用于：根据承载第二指示信息的第二资源或第二指示信息，确定承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，通信单元1710还用于：发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息指示承载第一指示信息的第一资源。
可选地，第一资源承载对应格式的第一指示信息。
可选地，第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：第一指示信息的格式是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载第一指示信息的资源是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，其中，第一格式和第二格式满足以下一项或多项：第一格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数小于第二格式的第一指示信息所占的比特数；第一格式的第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，第二格式的第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；或，第一格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于第二格式的第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第一格式，第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；其中，服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，第一域指示服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，第二域指示用于恢复服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
可选地，在链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示链路失败小区的标识；和/或，在链路失败小区的情况不满足预设条件的情况下，第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示链路失败小区的标识。
可选地，预设条件包括：链路失败小区的个数小于或等于预设的第一阈值，或，链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷小于或等于预设的第二阈值。
可选地，链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
该通信装置1700可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500和方法1600中的网络设备执行的步骤或者流程，该通信装置1700可以包括用于执行图5中的方法500和图16中方法1600中的网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1700中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图5中的方法500和图16中方法1600的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置1700用于执行图5中的方法500时，通信单元1710可用于执行方法500中的步骤520，处理单元1720可用于执行方法500中的步骤530。
当该通信装置1700用于执行图16中的方法1600时，通信单元1710可用于执行方法1600中的步骤1630、步骤1640、步骤1650、步骤1660。
应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1700中的通信单元为可通过图20中示出的网络设备1900中的收发器2010实现，该通信装置1700中的处理单元1720可通过图20中示出的网络设备1900中的处理器2020实现。
还应理解，该通信装置1700中的通信单元1710也可以为输入/输出接口。其中，收发器可以包括发射器和/或接收器，分别实现发送单元和接收单元的功能。
图18是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1800的又一示意性框图。如图所示，通信装置1800包括收发器1810、处理器1820、和存储器1830，存储器1830中存储有程序，处理器1820用于执行存储器1830中存储的程序，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820用于执行上文方法实施例中的相关处理步骤，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820控制收发器1810执行上文方法实施例中的收发相关步骤。
作为一种实现，该通信装置1800用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备所执行的动作，这时，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820用于执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的处理步骤，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820控制收发器1810执行上文方法实施例中终端设备侧的接收和发送步骤。
作为另一种实现，该通信装置1800用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备所执行的动作，这时，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820用于执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理步骤，对存储器1830中存储的程序的执行，使得处理器1820控制收发器1810执行上文方法实施例中网络设备侧的接收和发送步骤。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1900，该通信装置1900可以是终端设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1900可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置1900为终端设备时，图19示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图19中，终端设备以手机作为例子。如图19所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图19中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器，在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做 限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。
如图19所示，终端设备包括收发单元1910和处理单元1920。收发单元1910也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元1920也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选地，可以将收发单元1910中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元1910中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元1910包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元1920，用于执行图5中的步骤510和图16中的步骤1610、步骤1620，和/或，处理单元1920还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备侧的其他处理步骤。收发单元1910还用于执行图5中所示的步骤520、和图16中的步骤1630、步骤1640、步骤1650、步骤1660，和/或收发单元1910还用于执行终端设备侧的其他收发步骤。
应理解，图19仅为示例而非限定，上述包括收发单元和处理单元的终端设备可以不依赖于图19所示的结构。
当该通信设备1900为芯片时，该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口；处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1900，该通信装置1900可以是网络设备也可以是芯片。该通信装置1900可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置1900为网络设备时，例如为基站。图20示出了一种简化的基站结构示意图。基站包括2010部分以及2020部分。2010部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换；2020部分主要用于基带处理，对基站进行控制等。2010部分通常可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等。2020部分通常是基站的控制中心，通常可以称为处理单元，用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中网络设备侧的处理操作。
2010部分的收发单元，也可以称为收发机或收发器等，其包括天线和射频单元，其中射频单元主要用于进行射频处理。可选地，可以将2010部分中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即2010部分包括接收单元和发送单元。接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等，发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
2020部分可以包括一个或多个单板，每个单板可以包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。处理器用于读取和执行存储器中的程序以实现基带处理功能以及对基站的控制。若存在多个单板，各个单板之间可以互联以增强处理能力。作为一种可选的实施方式，也可以是多个单板共用一个或多个处理器，或者是多个单板共用一个或多个存储器，或者是多个单板同时共用一个或多个处理器。
例如，在一种实现方式中，2010部分的收发单元用于执行图5中的步骤510和图16 中的步骤1610、步骤1620，和/或2010部分的收发单元还用于执行本申请实施例中网络设备侧的其他收发步骤。2020部分的处理单元用于执行图5中的步骤530，和/或2020部分的处理单元还用于执行本申请实施例中网络设备侧的处理步骤。
应理解，图20仅为示例而非限定，上述包括收发单元和处理单元的网络设备可以不依赖于图20所示的结构。
当该通信装置1900为芯片时，该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口；处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
另外，网络设备不限于上述形态，也可以是其它形态：例如：包括AAU，还可以包括CU节点和/或DU节点，或者包括BBU和自适应无线单元(adaptive radio unit，ARU)，或BBU和AAU；也可以为客户终端设备(customer premises equipment，CPE)，还可以为其它形态，本申请不限定。
上述CU和/或DU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作，而AAU可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和接口。所述处理器可用于执行上述方法实施例中的方法。
应理解，上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如，该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。
在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。
应注意，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步 骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，
SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图5至图16所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图5至图16所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种系统，其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disc，SSD))等。
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤，除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实 体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如，部件可以是但不限于，在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示，在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中，部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外，这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据，例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (76)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定至少一个小区的链路失败；
    发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，
    其中，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    在发送所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：
    根据链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述通信方法还包括：
    在第三资源上发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  5. 根据权利要求2至4中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在发送所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：
    接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的，包括：
    如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第二格式；否则，如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，
    其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的 所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N2个链路失败小区的信息；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值。
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  13. 根据权利要求10或11所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括：X个Ci域，b个所述第一域，m个所述第二域，所述服务小区标识域包括所述X个Ci域；
    其中，所述X个Ci域中共有b个Ci域取值为1，所述b个取值为1的Ci域与所述b个第一域一一对应，
    所述b个第一域中共有m个第一域取值为1，所述m个取值为1的第一域与所述m个第二域一一对应，
    其中，b为小于或等于X的整数,m为小于或等于b的整数，且X大于1或等于1，b、m大于0或等于0。
  15. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的 方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
  16. 根据权利要求1至15中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
  17. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；
    基于所述第一指示信息，恢复链路失败小区的链路。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的通信方法，其特征在于，在接收所述第一指示信息之前，所述通信方法还包括：
    接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败；
    根据承载所述第二指示信息的第二资源或所述第二指示信息，确定承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述通信方法还包括：
    发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  20. 根据权利要求17至19中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
  21. 根据权利要求17至20中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的，包括：
    如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第二格式；否则，如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式。
  24. 根据权利要求17至23中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，
    其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的通信方法，其特征在于，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N2个链路失败小区的信息；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值。
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  27. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括：X个Ci域，b个所述第一域，m个所述第二域，所述服务小区标识域包括所述X个Ci域；
    其中，所述X个Ci域中共有b个Ci域取值为1，所述b个取值为1的Ci域与所述b个第一域一一对应，
    所述b个第一域中共有m个第一域取值为1，所述m个取值为1的第一域与所述m个第二域一一对应，
    其中，b为小于或等于X的整数,m为小于或等于b的整数，且X大于1或等于1，b、m大于0或等于0。
  29. 根据权利要求17至25中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比 特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
  30. 根据权利要求17至29中任一项所述的通信方法，其特征在于，
    所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
  31. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理单元和通信单元，
    所述处理单元用于：确定至少一个小区的链路失败；
    所述通信单元用于：发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，
    其中，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述通信单元还用于：
    根据链路失败小区的情况，在对应的第二资源上发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  34. 根据权利要求31所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元具体用于：
    在第三资源上发送第二指示信息，其中，所述第二指示信息用于请求承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  35. 根据权利要求31至34中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元还用于：
    接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  36. 根据权利要求31至35中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
  37. 根据权利要求31至36中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的，包括：
    如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第二格式；否则，如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式。
  40. 根据权利要求31至39中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，
    其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的 所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N2个链路失败小区的信息；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值。
  42. 根据权利要求40或41所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  43. 根据权利要求40或41所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  44. 根据权利要求43所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括：X个Ci域，b个所述第一域，m个所述第二域，所述服务小区标识域包括所述X个Ci域；
    其中，所述X个Ci域中共有b个Ci域取值为1，所述b个取值为1的Ci域与所述b个第一域一一对应，
    所述b个第一域中共有m个第一域取值为1，所述m个取值为1的第一域与所述m个第二域一一对应，
    其中，b为小于或等于X的整数,m为小于或等于b的整数，且X大于1或等于1，b、m大于0或等于0。
  45. 根据权利要求31至41中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的 方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
  46. 根据权利要求31至45中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
  47. 根据权利要求31至46中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元为处理器，所述通信单元为收发器。
  48. 根据权利要求31至47中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置为以下任一项：终端设备、芯片或芯片系统。
  49. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理单元和通信单元，
    所述通信单元用于：接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息指示链路失败小区的信息，所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的；
    所述处理单元用于：基于所述第一指示信息，恢复链路失败小区的链路。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信单元还用于：
    接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息指示小区链路失败；
    所述处理单元具体用于：根据承载所述第二指示信息的第二资源或所述第二指示信息，确定承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述通信单元还用于：
    发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息指示承载所述第一指示信息的第一资源。
  52. 根据权利要求49至51中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    第一资源承载对应格式的所述第一指示信息。
  53. 根据权利要求49至52中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息是基于链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的；和/或，承载所述第一指示信息的资源是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的。
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是基于所述链路失败小区的情况确定的，包括：
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的。
  55. 根据权利要求54所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式是根据网络设备分配的资源大小确定的，包括：
    如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一第二格式；否则，如果所述网络设备分配的资源能够承载所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式。
  56. 根据权利要求49至55中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第一格式或第二格式，
    其中，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示 信息所占的比特数；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息指示N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息指示N2个链路失败小区的信息，其中，N1、N2为大于1或等于1的整数，且N1<N2；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载。
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一格式和所述第二格式满足以下一项或多项：
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息所占的比特数最大值；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N1个链路失败小区的信息，所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息最多指示所述N2个链路失败小区的信息；
    所述第一格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值小于所述第二格式的所述第一指示信息包括的信息的负载最大值。
  58. 根据权利要求56或57所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为所述第一格式，所述第一格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过状态值指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  59. 根据权利要求56或57所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示信息的格式为第二格式，所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括以下一项或多项信息：
    服务小区标识域、第一域、或第二域；
    其中，所述服务小区标识域通过位图指示链路失败小区的标识，
    所述第一域指示所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区是否存在对应的第二域，
    所述第二域指示用于恢复所述服务小区标识域指示的链路失败小区链路的参考信号信息。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述第二格式的第一指示信息包括：X个Ci域，b个所述第一域，m个所述第二域，所述服务小区标识域包括所述X个Ci域；
    其中，所述X个Ci域中共有b个Ci域取值为1，所述b个取值为1的Ci域与所述b个第一域一一对应，
    所述b个第一域中共有m个第一域取值为1，所述m个取值为1的第一域与所述m个第二域一一对应，
    其中，b为小于或等于X的整数,m为小于或等于b的整数，且X大于1或等于1，b、m大于0或等于0。
  61. 根据权利要求49至57中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况满足预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过状态值的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识；和/或，
    在所述链路失败小区的情况不满足所述预设条件的情况下，所述第一指示信息通过比特位图的方式指示所述链路失败小区的标识。
  62. 根据权利要求49至61中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述链路失败小区的情况包括：链路失败小区的个数和/或链路失败小区的信息的有效载荷。
  63. 根据权利要求49至62中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元为处理器，所述通信单元为收发器。
  64. 根据权利要求49至63中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置为以下任一项：网络设备、芯片或芯片系统。
  65. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  66. 一种通信装置，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
  67. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  68. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器，所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
  69. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    通信接口，用于输入和/或输出信息；
    处理器，用于执行计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  70. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    通信接口，用于输入和/或输出信息；
    处理器，用于执行计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
  71. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  72. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
  73. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在 计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  74. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
  75. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。
  76. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求17至30中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/105763 2019-08-02 2020-07-30 一种通信方法和通信装置 WO2021023090A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA3146666A CA3146666A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2020-07-30 Reducing wasting of resources for reporting information about a link failure cell
EP20850580.0A EP4007347A4 (en) 2019-08-02 2020-07-30 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS
US17/591,045 US20220159767A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2022-02-02 Communication Method And Communications Apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910713406.7 2019-08-02
CN201910713406.7A CN112312441B (zh) 2019-08-02 2019-08-02 一种通信方法和通信装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/591,045 Continuation US20220159767A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2022-02-02 Communication Method And Communications Apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021023090A1 true WO2021023090A1 (zh) 2021-02-11

Family

ID=74486725

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/105763 WO2021023090A1 (zh) 2019-08-02 2020-07-30 一种通信方法和通信装置

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20220159767A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4007347A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN112312441B (zh)
CA (1) CA3146666A1 (zh)
WO (1) WO2021023090A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20220007638A (ko) * 2019-05-15 2022-01-18 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 D2d 시스템 중의 통신 방법 및 단말 장치, 네트워크 장치

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103379517A (zh) * 2012-04-13 2013-10-30 华为技术有限公司 无线链路失败报告处理方法、异常事件统计处理方法及设备和系统
US20190037604A1 (en) * 2017-07-28 2019-01-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Random access channel procedures with multiple carriers
CN110034799A (zh) * 2018-01-11 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和通信设备
CN110062397A (zh) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 华硕电脑股份有限公司 无线通信中在多小区配置下波束故障报告的方法和设备

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109478918B (zh) * 2017-06-09 2021-06-22 华为技术有限公司 波束失败报告发送方法、接收方法、用户设备和网络设备
US11419173B2 (en) * 2017-08-09 2022-08-16 Idac Holdings, Inc. Methods and systems for beam recovery and management
CN113747585A (zh) * 2017-11-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 一种链路恢复方法、终端设备及网络设备
US11956827B2 (en) * 2018-01-05 2024-04-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method of beam recovery on secondary cell

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103379517A (zh) * 2012-04-13 2013-10-30 华为技术有限公司 无线链路失败报告处理方法、异常事件统计处理方法及设备和系统
US20190037604A1 (en) * 2017-07-28 2019-01-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Random access channel procedures with multiple carriers
CN110034799A (zh) * 2018-01-11 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和通信设备
CN110062397A (zh) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 华硕电脑股份有限公司 无线通信中在多小区配置下波束故障报告的方法和设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4007347A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4007347A4 (en) 2022-08-24
CN112312441A (zh) 2021-02-02
CA3146666A1 (en) 2021-02-11
US20220159767A1 (en) 2022-05-19
CN112312441B (zh) 2022-09-23
EP4007347A1 (en) 2022-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11575483B2 (en) Devices and methods for HARQ-ACK feedback scheme on PUSCH in wireless communication systems
CN111758233B (zh) 调度请求和ack/nack的优先化
US11224050B2 (en) Method and apparatus for allocating dynamic resources of integrated access and backhaul nodes in wireless communication system
WO2020228589A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2018228191A1 (en) System and method for beam failure recovery request reporting
WO2021027750A1 (zh) 更新波束信息的方法和通信装置
US20210050961A1 (en) SPS Release Handling for Code Block Group-Based Dynamic HARQ-ACK Codebook
WO2018171640A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法、终端设备及基站系统
WO2015110035A1 (zh) 物理上行链路信道配置方法以及基站和用户设备
WO2020143692A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2020034877A1 (zh) 链路失败恢复方法及相关设备
JP2022110037A (ja) 反復のためのシグナリング
JP2020505868A (ja) 物理アップリンク制御チャネル（ｐｕｃｃｈ）のためのリソース割振り
WO2020164600A1 (zh) 信息指示的方法及装置
WO2020207333A1 (zh) 链路失败恢复的方法和装置
KR20210098129A (ko) 이동 통신 시스템에서 기기내 상호 간섭에 영향을 받은 주파수 정보를 보고하는 방법 및 장치
US20200146039A1 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
WO2022022286A2 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting csi report
US11089597B2 (en) User terminal and radio communication method
CN115023904A (zh) 辅助小区(scell)波束故障恢复(bfr)的用户设备(ue)能力
WO2021062832A1 (zh) 一种波束失败检测方法及装置
WO2021062689A1 (zh) 一种上行传输的方法及装置
WO2021017848A1 (zh) 用于链路失败恢复的方法和装置
WO2021023090A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和通信装置
WO2020151729A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20850580

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 3146666

Country of ref document: CA

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020850580

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220225